Series MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 07 A EC97J1128

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Series MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 07 A EC97J1128"

Transcription

1 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS W o r l d S u p e r Series EC97J11 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation's Fukuyama Works, which produces these products, is certified as meeting the ISO 1:004 environmental management system standard. 07 A

2 INDEX This material has been prepared for those who use the products for manufacturing assemblies, for holding electric works, for holding maintenance and for the others acquainted with electric expertise including those who operate the products (final users). Introduction... 1 Features... The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution Series Configuration and List of Product Models Detailed Specifications... 1 Molded-Case Circuit s... 1 Earth-Leakage Circuit s... 1 Motor-Protection s... UL Listed Products... Miniature Circuit s... 7 ELRs and ZCTs... 1 Circuit Protectors.... Special Purpose s... 4 Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers)... 4 DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches Hz-Use MCCBs... Low-Instantaneous MCCBs... Generator-Protection MCCBs... Measuring Display Unit (MDU) s Connection Method Connection Types. Connection Accessories. Connection of Line and Load

3 Caution The manual covers the product specifications for selecting an appropriate low-voltage breaker. There is the HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE describing how to handle the products. To use the products, separately request the HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE, for correct operation. 1. Accessories... 4 Internal Accessories Accessories.... Switch Operation and Rating.... Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories Shunt Trip (SHT).... Undervoltage Trip (UVT).... Test Button Module (TBM) Lead-wire Specifications.... Internal Terminal Type (INT) Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT).... Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) Trip Indicator (TI) ø4w Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR)... External Accessories V-type Operating Handle.... F-type Operating Handle.... S-type Operating Handle R-type Operating Handle.... Terminal Cover.... Electrical Operation Device Mechanical Interlocks (MI).... Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder IEC mm Rail Mounting Adapters.... Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s and Motor s Earth-Leakage Circuit s... 7 UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s Miniature Circuit s DIN Series Circuit Protectors Ordering Information... 1 Molded-Case Circuit s... 1 Earth-Leakage Circuit s Melshort (A more rational and easier breakers selections) 9. Low-voltage switchgears Technical information service via the internet... 1 (

4 Full range of MITS (0A to 1 High-Performance Downsizing of 0AF, New Digital ETR Previous New 1 Glo Compliance with w ASTA 7 7 Time (s) 1 x 4 1 x 1 x Ir Switch Current setting with fuse High High-voltage fuse- voltage Allowable short-time Ip TL characteristics Low Long-delay operating time voltage Transformer Pre-alarm NFB current Short-delay (electronic) Is tripping current M Short-delay Load Load current Ts operating time Ii Instantaneous tripping current Current (A) Current-converted value on the high-voltage side EN TUV GB CCC TPC JIS Volume 0% downsized New Digital ETR IEC SABS Best Solution Plenty of accessories, Easy installation AF (Type SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW ) Product Skelton LR GL DNV ABS BV NK World Super Series

5 UBISHI WS Series 00A frame) bal orldwide standards Relay JPT Reliable High reliability, Best performance Mechanism Breaking Performance Terminal CSA UL Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories Intelligent Measuring and communicating Personal Computer By using various application software for P, users can also connect to the network SCADA system. MELSECNET/ Interface card MELSECNET/ CC-Link P Interface Unit I/O Unit Eco Monitor Pro ME1S AE-SW MDU

6 Global Compliance with worldwide standards World Super ASTA EN TUV GB CCC JIS CSA UL Series TPC IEC SABS LR GL DNV ABS BV NK WS Series International Standard Conformance List Safety Certification Marine Approvals IEC JIS EN GB UL CSA LR GL DNV ABS BV NK International Japan Europe China USA Canada UK Germany Norway USA France Japan Standards Compliance with worldwide standards (IEC/JIS/EN/GB/UL/CSA) Applicable to marine approvals New design with Laser Marking All products with lsolation function RoHS compliance RoHS The Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Full range of WS Series (up to 0AF) MCCB EB AF (0) NF-C NF0-CS NF-CW NF-S NF-SW NF-SW NF0-SEW NF-H NF-U NV-C NV-S NV-H NV-U NV0-CS NV-SW NF-HW NV-CW NV-SW NV-HW NF1-CW NF1-SW NF1-SGW NF1-HW NF1-HGW NF1-RGW NF1-UGW NV1-CW NV1-SW NV1-HW NV1-RW NF-SW NF-SGW NF-HW NF-HGW NF-CW NF-SW NF-SGW NF-HW NF-HGW NF-RGW NF-UGW NV-CW NV-SW NV-SEW NV-HW NV-HEW NV-RW NF0-CW NF0-SW NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW NF0-UEW NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV0-REW NF0-CW NF0-SW NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NF00-CEW NF00-SEW NF00-SDW NF00-HEW NF00-REW NF00-UEW NV00-SEW NV00-HEW NF-SGW P NF1-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SEW NF0-SDW

7 High-Performance Downsizing, New Digital ETR World Super Series 0AF, 0AF & 00AF models easier to use 0AF models downsized to the size of 0AF model, contributing to compact panels and simplification of design. MCCB-AC/DC common use (excl. Electronic trip type) :available up to 0VDC, :available up to 0VDC (NF0-SW, NF0-SW) Previous New 1 Improved breaking capacity at VAC (NF0-HEW, NF0-HEW) 7 7 Previous Icu/Ics 1/1 ka New Icu/Ics /1 ka Volume 0% downsized Improved breaking capacity at 0/41VAC (NF0-SEW, NF0-SW/SEW, NF00-SEW) Previous Icu/Ics 4/4 ka New Icu/Ics / ka NEW Digital ETR (Electronic Trip Relay) for NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW & NF0-SEW Installed digital ETR same as Electronic relay for under 00AF Multi adjustment available (Long time delay, short time delay, Instantaneous, pre-alarm characteristics):easier coordination with upper breakers. Pre-alarm equipped as Standard:LED turned on when load current exceeds pre-alarm setting current. Suitable for use as a main breaker:isolation comformity to IEC Standard. Rated current Long time-delay operating time Current setting Short time-delay tripping current Short time-delay operating time Pre-alarm current Instantaneous tripping current Time (s) 1 x 4 Ir 1 x 1 x Previous Current setting Is Current (A) Short-delay tripping current Time (s) 1 x 4 1 x 1 x Ip Ir Pre-alarm current Load current New Switch Current setting with fuse High-voltage fuse- Allowable short-time TL characteristics Long-delay operating time Is Ts Current (A) Ii Short-delay tripping current Short-delay operating time Instantaneous tripping current Current-converted value on the high-voltage side High voltage Low voltage Transformer NFB (electronic) M Load 4

8 Reliable High reliability, Best performance Technology for WS Series Relay Relay-unit Thermal type & Electronic type AC/DC common use Thermal adjustable range is expanded. Mechanism Isolation suitability Class ll insulation Increased operating cycles Breaking Performance Increased lcu High voltage Ics=% lcu JPT Terminal IP0 Mold-cover Finger protection Front compression terminal Box terminal Rear PM Internal Accessories Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer External Accessories Cassette-type accessories Wide range of Rated Voltage Electric operators High speed type Isolation suitability IP0 PM with Safety Device Handle Lock Device R/V handle IP Terminal cover [PA Auto-Puffer] Adopted on SGW, Polymer Ablation type Auto-Puffer [ HGW, RGW, UGW] [JPT] Adopted on SGW, Jet Pressure Trip Mechanism [ HGW, RGW, UGW] [Advanced ISTAC] Adopted on SGW,HGW, Advanced Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator [ RGW, UGW ] [Shunt-less] Adopted on SGW, Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [ HGW, RGW, UGW] Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without flexible wires. This shunt-less structure achieves the increased operating cycles. Holder Movable contact Endurance (C-O cycles) (times),000,000 Electrical Mechanical 0,000 0,000,000 0 NF1-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW Spring Movable contact revolving shaft During revolution the movable contact is constantly in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.

9 LNN49-11 MADE IN JAPAN I MADE IN JAPAN LNN4-1 World Super Series Best performance of SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW Breaking Capacity lcu/lcs (ka) U(UGW) 0 0VAC R(RGW) 0VAC 0VAC 41VAC H(HGW) 4VAC 0VAC S(SGW) Series VAC Max. peak current (ka) ( ) MAX. I t (A s) Max. let-through peak current (ka) (0VAC) Prospective short-circuit current asym. peak NF-HGW NF-UGW Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(ka) I t let-through characteristics (0VAC) NF-HGW NF-UGW Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(ka) types of Relay for SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW Thermal Adjustable Relay li(dc)=1.xli(ac) 4 li(xa AC) T lr li MODEL RT ln A /0Hz PE 00 lr(a) Rating ln(a) 1 Type NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF1-SGW/HGW Hi Lo Tripping threshold lr (A) Neutral protection (note 1) 4PE 4P4E Overload Protection (Thermal) No Protection 1 lr Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic) Fixed Adjustable Tripping threshold li ln (AC), 1 ln (DC) 4 to ln (AC),. to 1 ln(dc) Note: (1) The type 4PE is standard. If the type 4P4E is required, specify the type 4P4E separately and explicitly. Thermal type unit lr li l Electronic Relay T MODEL RE ln A AC only /0Hz Ir (A) TEST T L(s) Is (XIr) Ts (s) T lp TL lr Ii ls Ts Ip (XA) TL Ir Is Ts Ii 7. % li Ip (XIr) l PAL 4PE OVER I pn 4P4E Rating Type ln(a) (C) 1 NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW Hi NF1-SGW/HGW Lo Tripping threshold lr (A) Tripping time TL(s) LTD Neutral protection (Slectable) STD INST PAL Pickup current ls Tripping time Ts(s) Tripping threshold li Pickup current lp Tp %-LED (green) PAL-LED (orange) Over-LED (red) Overload Protection step adjustable (at lr) 0-1 lr (Step adjustable) Short-Circuit Protection lr step adjustable step adjustable (at 1. ls) 4 to 14 ln continuous adjustable Pre-Alarm (for Indication) lr step adjustable TL/ Indicator (LED) Lights at 0.7 lr Flashs at lp and Lights at over Tp Lights at 1.1 lr Electronic type unit

10 Best Solution Plenty of Accessories, Easy installation Internal Accessories Internal accessories become easier to use by adopting a cassette type. Common use of different voltages realizes the major reduction in types. The UVT for EB is also available. Time delay type variations have also been expanded, offering a wide range of applications. Way Lead Wire () Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT) Previous models WS Series (New) SHT voltuge AC (V) DC (V) (4), (4), -, 00-, 0-4, (4-) (1), (4), (), (4),, (1), (1), (0) 4-4, -, 0-1, 4-, -4, -1, 0- UVT voltuge AC (V) -1, (-), 00-0, (0-), (0-41), 0-4, (4-), (0-) DC (V) (4), (4),, (1) 4/4, -1/-, 00-0/0-, 0-41/4-, 0-/ 4/4, /1, 1/1 Lead-wire to Line side Flying Lead-wire Cassette-type Accessories Cassette-type accessories give greater flexbility when upgrading circuits. Easier ordering and one-touch simple installation become possible. The insulation function increases its safety. Fits all breaker series The alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT), and undervoltage trip (UVT) all come as cassette-type accessories to suit all breaker series. 1.Push the trip button (PTT).Loosen the front cover screws.open the front cover 4.Install the accessories.close the front cover and tighten the screws. External Accessories Hight-speed Motor Device Motor devices for 1-AF become easier to use:contributing to the simple installation. Adoption of a spring charge mechanism for high-speed operation (0.0~0.econds) Swift and simple installation by tightening only two screws. Power Supply Module External Handle Adoption of a safer and easy to operate handle. Complying with protection degree IP. Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit. Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as well. Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent false operation. V-Handle R-Handle IP-0PM with Safety Device [Adopted on SGW, HGW] Specialized for -and use ( pole incompatible). Complies with the protection degree IP0. Safety device supplied as an option. May be connected with up to nine leads (for PLT). May be modified from front connection to rear connection. (Note: Modification by end users not authorized) IP0: Finger protection. (IP-0PM) 7

11 World Super Series Product design which pursues greater ease of use by wide variations IP-0 Terminal Connection With the SGW, HGW, connection safety has been increased. Standard IP-0 protection degree ensured. Terminal Cover Major improvements have been achieved in front connection terminal safety. With terminal covers, IP protection degree is ensured. (Type SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW ) Variable Connections Compatible with various connection methods. Solderless terminals are now built inside the breaker contrary to the conventional style where terminals were built outside. Maximum connecting Cable of 1mm (SGW/HGW). (Note: Certain models have externally attached terminals) IEC Rail Mounting for, AF The,AF includes installation hooks to IEC rails, greatly simplifying installation works. Handle Locks With the WS Series, ON/OFF locking is possible with the padlock. Up to three padlocks may be attached. Customers are requested their own padlocks. ON Lock OFF Lock OFF Lock with Padlock (Type SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW ) Intelligent Measuring and communicating MDU (Measuring Display Unit) with NF -00AF Small and white measuring unit Measuring data can be transmitted to PC or P through CC-Link AL / AX with CC-Link transmission Improved accuracy(electric energy): ±.% of rated value ±.% of true value Personal Computer By using various application software for P, users can also connect to the network SCADA system. MELSECNET/ Interface card MELSECNET/ CC-Link P Interface Unit I/O Unit Eco Monitor Pro ME1S AE-SW MDU

12 Product Skelton

13 World Super Series MCCB Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT)* Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE)* 4 Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM)* Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type)* Super current-limiting unit* 7 Solderless (BOX) terminals Front connection nuts 9 Rear connections Insulating barrier (BA-F) 11 Small terminal cover (TC-S) 1 Large terminal cover (TC-L) 1 Rear terminal cover (BTC) 14 Plug-in base (PM) 1 Connections for Plug-in 1 Mechanical interlock device (MI) 17 OFF Lock with Padlock (HLF) 1 Handle lock device (/HLF/HLN/HLS) 19 Variable-depth operating handle (V type) 0 Rotary operating handle (R type) 1 Electrical operation device (MD) Alarm/Auxiliary switch device (AL/AX) Under voltage trip device (UVT) 4 Shunt trip device (SHT) Note *: All the accessories are field type except No.,, 4, and

14 1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models Series Configuration Molded-case circuit breakers NF-C Economy type NF-S Standard type NF-H High-performance type NF-U Current limiting-type ultra breaker Earth-leakage circuit breakers NV-C Economy type NV-S Standard type NV-H High-performance type NV-U Ultra current-limiting type Motor-protection breakers MB Motor breaker Circuit protectors CP0-BA CP-B CP-S For equipment Miniature circuit breakers BH BH-P BH-S BH-PS BH-D BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D NEMA-type for consumer unit DIN-series for general consumer unit 11

15 1 List of Product Models Series NF-C Economy type Molded-case circuit breaker Earth-leakage circuit breaker Motor-protection breaker NF-S Standard type NF-H High-performance type NF-U Ultra current-limiting type NV-C Economy type NV-S Standard type Frame A NV-H High-performance type NV-U Ultra current-limiting type (0) 1 () NF0-CS NF-CW NF1-CW NF-CW NF0-CW NF0-CW NF-SW NF-SW NF-HW NF1-SW NF-SW NF-SW NF0-SW NF0-SW NF00-SDW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW NF0-SEW NF1-SGW NF-SGW NF-SGW NF0-SEW NF0-SEW NF00-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SDW NF1-HW NF-HW NF-HW NF0-HEW NF0-HEW NF00-HEW NF1-HGW NF-HGW NF-HGW NF0-REW NF0-REW NF00-REW NF1-RGW NF-RGW NF0-UEW NF00-UEW NF1-UR NF1-UGW NF-UGW NV0-CS NV-CW NV1-CW NV-CW NV0-CW NV0-CW NV-SW NV-SW NV-HW NV1-SW NV1-HW NV1-RW NV-SW NV0-SW NV0-SW NV00-SEW NV-SEW NV0-SEW NV0-SEW NV-HW NV0-HEW NV0-HEW NV00-HEW NV-HEW NV0-REW NV-RW MB0-CS MB-CW MB Motor breaker MB-SW MB-SW MB0-SW MB-SW NF00-CEW NF-UL UL49 Listed Molded-case circuit breaker UL listed products NV-UL Earth-leakage protector UL49 Listed Molded-case circuit breaker Frame A Series UL49 Listed Molded-case circuit breaker UL listed products Earth-leakage protector UL49 Listed Molded-case circuit breaker Details will be available ( upon request. ) NF-SWU NF-CWU NF-SJW NF-SFW NF-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW NF-SWU NF-HJW NV-SWU NV-SWU NV-CWU NV-SKW Details will be available ( upon request. ) Miniature Circuit s AF 0 BH BH-P BH BH-S BH-PS DIN Series AF and less MCB RCCB RCBO Isolating switch BH-D BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D Circuit Protectors AF 0 and less CP0-BA CP CP-B CP-S 1

16 . Detailed Specifications Molded-Case Circuit s Series Frame Size C series 0 S series C series S series H series C series 1 Photo NF0-CS NF-SW NF-CW NF-SW NF-HW NF1-CW Rated current In (Amp.) Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC (/0Hz) DC Suitability for isolation Utilization category Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Pollution degree without current Number of operating cycles Overall dimensions (mm) with current V V 0V 4V 41V 0V 0V 0V V 00V 4V-In/ 4V-In V-In/ V-In a b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Fixed Busbar terminal Installation and Rear (B) connections Rear (PM) Plug-in Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) IEC mm rail Mounting hook (option) Adapter (option) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection with Internal terminal type (INT) (option) with Flying leads Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (PAL) accessories (option) Overcurrent trip alarm Cylinder key lock Available soon (OAL) (S) Dustproof Enclosure ( I ) Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock (MI) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL) (HL-S) Lock cover () External accessories (V) External Door (option) (S) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) L/R G/L Marine approval BV DNV ABS Automatic tripping device Trip button Notes 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 0V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 0V DC. : Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 0V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 00V DC. : Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified. 4: Specify if for DC use. : Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF0-CS. a b ca c /1. 1./1. 1./1../ (V) A 4,000,000 (41V),000 (41V) Hydraulicmagnetic 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (1) 1 0 (0) (0) /1./1./1 / / 7./4./ /1./1./1 / / 7./4./1 4 7./ /4 7./4 7./4 7./4 7./4 1/ 7./4 4./1 7./4 / / / / /1 A A A A,000,000,000 7,000,000, ,000 1,000, ,000 1,000, Hydraulicmagnetic Equipped Hydraulicmagnetic Equipped Hydraulicmagnetic Equipped Hydraulicmagnetic Equipped Line Line Load Load (0) (7) /4 / / / / 0/1 7./4 1 A,000,000, Thermalmagnetic Equipped 1

17 S series NF1-SW (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 1 /4 1/ 1/9 /1 0/1 0/1 0/1 / A,000 0,000,000 1,000 1,000 Thermalmagnetic Equipped 1 1/ NF1-SGW RT 1 01 / / 0/0 / / / / / A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF1-SGW RE / / 0/0 / / / / / A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1, Electronic Equipped /0 NF1-HW (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 / /11 0/1 / / / / / A,000 0,000,000 1,000 1,000 Thermalmagnetic Equipped / H series Electronic 1 NF1-HGW RT /0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF1-HGW RE /0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1, Equipped / U series NF1-RGW RT 1 / 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1, Equipped NF1-UGW RT 1 0/0 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 A,000,000 0,000 1,000 1,000 1 Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Equipped

18 . Detailed Specifications Molded-Case Circuit s Series Frame Size S series H series Photo NF-SW NF-SGW RT NF-SGW RE NF-HW NF-HGW RT NF-HGW RE Rated current In (Amp.) Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC (/0Hz) DC Suitability for isolation Utilization category Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Pollution degree without current Number of operating cycles Overall dimensions (mm) with current V V 0V 4V 41V 0V 0V 0V V 00V 4V-In/ 4V-In V-In/ V-In a b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Fixed Busbar terminal Installation and Rear (B) connections Rear (PM) Plug-in Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) IEC mm rail Mounting hook (option) Adapter (option) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection with Internal terminal type (INT) (option) with Flying leads Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (PAL) accessories (option) Overcurrent trip alarm Cylinder key lock Available soon (OAL) (S) Dustproof Enclosure ( I ) Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock (MI) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL) (HL-S) Lock cover () External accessories (V) External Door (option) (S) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) L/R G/L Marine approval BV DNV ABS Automatic tripping device Trip button Notes 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 0V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 0V DC. : Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 0V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 00V DC. : Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified. a b ca c 4 1/ /1 0/1 0/1 0/1 / 1/ 1 A 1,000 4,000 4,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped 4 / / 0/0 / / / / / 0/0 A,000 0,000 0,000 1,000 Thermalmagnetic Equipped 4 / / 0/0 / / / / / A,000 0,000 0,000 1,000 Line Electronic Equipped 4 4 / 0/ /1 /1 /1 /1 / 0/0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / /0 1 / A A 1,000 4,000 4,000 1,000 1,000,000 0,000 0,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped Line Load Thermalmagnetic Equipped Load 4 0/0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / A,000 0,000 0,000 1,000 1, Electronic Equipped 1

19 C series S series H series U series 4 4 NF-SW () / /1 0/1 0/1 0/1 / A 1,000 4,000 4, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF-SGW RT 1 / / 0/0 / / / / / A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF-SGW RE 1 / / 0/0 / / / / / A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1, Electronic Equipped NF-HW / 0/ /1 /1 /1 /1 / A 1,000 4,000 4,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF-HGW RT 1 0/0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1, Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF-HGW RE 1 0/0 / / / / 7/7 7/7 / A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1, Electronic Equipped.1 NF-RGW RT 1 / 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1,000 1 Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF-UGW RT 1 0/0 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 A,000 1,000,000 1,000 1,000 1 Equipped / 1 0/0 / / NF-CW () / 1 00 / 1/ 1/9 1/9 1/9 /1 A,000 4,000 4, Thermalmagnetic Equipped

20 . Detailed Specifications Molded-Case Circuit s Series Frame Size C series 0 S series 0 0 H series 0 Photo NF0-CW NF0-SW NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW Rated current In (Amp.) ~0 adjustable 00~0 adjustable 00~0 adjustable Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC (/0Hz) DC Suitability for isolation Utilization category Rated short-time withstand current Icw (ka) Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Pollution degree a ca c Overall dimensions (mm) b V 0V 4V 41V 0V 0V 0V V a b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Installation Fixed Busbar terminal and connections Rear (B) Rear (PM) Plug-in Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection with Internal terminal type (INT) (option) with Flying leads Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (PAL) accessories (option) Overcurrent trip alarm Trip indicator (OAL) (TI) (S) Dustproof Enclosure ( I ) Waterproof (W) Motoroperated type Electrical (MD) operation device Springcharge type (MDS) Mechanical interlock (MI) (HL) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL-S) External Lock cover () accessories (option) (V) External Door (S) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) L/R G/L Marine approval BV DNV ABS Automatic tripping device Trip button 1/ /1 /1 /1 /0 / 0/ 4 A Notes 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ). : Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.) : Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified. 4: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 0V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 0V DC. Thermalmagnetic Equipped 4 /(/) 1 0/0(/) 1 4/4(/) 1 4/4(/) 1 4/4(/) 1 /(4/4) 1 /(/) 1 / 4 A Thermalmagnetic Equipped Line 4 /(/) 1 0/0(/) 1 4/4(/) 1 /(/) 1 /(/) 1 /(4/4) 1 /(/) 1 B Electronic Equipped Line Load 4 /1 / / / / / / B Electronic Equipped Load / 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/7 B Electronic Equipped 17

21 C series S series 0 NF0-CW /9 /1 /1 /1 /0 / A Thermalmagnetic Equipped 0 H series U series NF0-UEW 00~0 adjustable B 00 Electronic Equipped 1/1 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/ / 4..0 NF0-SW / 0/0 4/4 / / / / A 1 Thermalmagnetic Equipped / NF0-SEW 00~0 adjustable / 0/0 4/4 / / / / B 7. 1 Electronic Equipped NF0-HEW 00~0 adjustable /1 / / / / / / B 7. 1 Electronic Equipped NF0-REW 00~0 adjustable / 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/7 B Electronic Equipped 1 1

22 . Detailed Specifications Molded-Case Circuit s Series Frame Size C series 00 S series 00 H series 00 Photo NF00-CEW NF00-SDW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NF00-REW Rated current In (Amp.) 0~00 adjustable (0) 00 0~00 adjustable 0~00 adjustable 0~00 adjustable Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC (/0Hz) DC Suitability for isolation Utilization category Rated short-time withstand current low (ka) Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Pollution degree a ca c Overall dimensions (mm) b V 0V 4V 41V 0V 0V 0V V Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Installation Fixed Busbar terminal and connections Rear (B) Rear (PM) Plug-in Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection with Internal terminal type (INT) (option) with Flying leads Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (PAL) accessories (option) Overcurrent trip alarm Trip indicator (OAL) (TI) (S) Dustproof Enclosure ( I ) Waterproof (W) Motoroperated type Electrical (MD) operation device Springcharge type (MDS) Mechanical interlock (MI) (HL) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL-S) External Lock cover () accessories (option) (V) External Door (S) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) L/R G/L Marine approval BV DNV ABS Automatic tripping device Trip button Notes 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ). : Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.) : Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified. 4: Specify if for DC use. : Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF0-SW, NF1-SW, NF1-SDW, NF0-SW, and NF0-SDW. a b c ca 1/9 /1 /1 /1 /0 / B Electronic Equipped / 4 A Thermalmagnetic Equipped 4 / 0/0 4/4 / / / / B Electronic Equipped 4 1/1 / / / / / / B Electronic Equipped / 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/7 B Electronic Equipped 19

23 0 B Electronic Equipped /1 / /4 /4 /4 /4 1/ NF0-SEW 0 B Electronic Equipped /1 / /4 /4 /4 /4 1/ S series 0 4 NF1-SEW 00~1 adjustable /0 4 A 1 1 Thermalmagnetic Equipped NF1-SDW B Electronic Equipped /1 / /4 /4 /4 /4 1/ NF0-SEW 00~0 adjustable /0 4 A 1 1 Magnetic Equipped NF0-SDW 0 0 B Electronic Equipped / 1/1 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/ U series 4 NF00-UEW 0~00 adjustable 0~0 adjustable 0

24 . Detailed Specifications Earth-Leakage Circuit s Series Frame size C series S series C series S series H series C series 0 1 Photo Rated current In (Amp.) Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) NV0-CS NV-SW () (1) 1 0 (0) NV-CW () () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) NV-SW () () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) NV-HW (1) 1 0 (0) (0) NV1-CW (0) (7) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type 0, , , , , 00 0 High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) 0 Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) 00 0 Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) ( ) Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button Button Button AC4V /./1 7./4 / / Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) AC0V / / 7./4 / / IEC0947- (Icu/Ics) AC0V./ / 7./4 1/ /1 0/1 without current,000,000,000 1,000 1,000,000 Number of operating cycles 4V-In/,000 (0V),000,000 1,000 1,000,000 with current 4V-In,000 (0V),000,000,000,000,000 a ca c a Overall dimensions (mm) b 9 b c ca 7 Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal Fixed Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Busbar terminal Installation and Rear (B) connections Rear (PM) Plug-in Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) IEC mm rail Mounting hook (option) Adapter (option) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N) Synchronous closing (UVT-S) Insulation switch (MG) Built-in Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) accessories (option) Test button module Pre-alarm-contact output (TBM) (PAL) Cylinder key lock Available soon Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection (option) with Flying leads Enclosure Dustproof (S) ( I ) Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock (MI) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL) (HL-S) Lock cover () External (V) accessories External Door (S) (option) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) Automatic tripping device Hydraulicmagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetic Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Thermal- Trip button CE marking 7 Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Note 1: 1A rated current is p only. : Cassette-type aaccessories are not acceptable for NV0-CS. : Standard type is thus SLT equipped. 4: In case of ampere rating 1A and 1A, time-delay type is not available. : Included in AL (type) only. : Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 7: Specify if for CE marking. In case of the CE marking article of A Frame or less, outside sizes differ. Rated operational voltage Available voltage range - 0V 0~V - 4V 0~V 00-4V ~V 1

25 S series 1 H series 1 U series 1 C series S series H series U series NV1-SW NV1-HW 4 (1) 1 0 (0) 4 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) (0) (7) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type 0, , ( ) Button ( ) Button /1 0/1 /,000 0,000,000 / / /,000 0,000, NV-SW Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button /1 0/1 / 1,000 4,000 4, NV-SEW 1 Adjustable 4 4 Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button /1 0/1 / 1,000 4,000 4, NV-HW Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button /1 /1 / 1,000 4,000 4, NV-HEW 1 Adjustable 4 4 Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button /1 /1 / 1,000 4,000 4, NV1-RW 4 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 4 Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button 1/1 1/1 1/1,000 0,000, Thermalmagnetic NV-CW Multi-voltage type 0, ( ) Button 1/ 1/9 /1,000 4,000 4, Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Equipped Thermalmagnetimagnetimagnetic Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Electronic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped NV-RW Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button 1/1 1/1 1/1 1,000 4,000 4, Thermalmagnetic Equipped

26 . Detailed Specifications Earth-Leakage Circuit s Series Frame size C series 0 S series 0 H series 0 Photo NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW Rated current In (Amp.) Rated ambient temperature ( C) Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) High-speed type Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system AC4V Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu/Ics) AC0V AC0V Suitability for isolation a ca c a Overall dimensions (mm) b b c ca Mass of front-connection type (kg) Screw terminal Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) Fixed Installation and Busbar terminal connections Rear (B) Plug-in Rear (PM) Rear/front IP0 (PM-IP) Alarm switch (AL) Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) accessories Shunt trip (SHT) (option) Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N) Synchronous closing (UVT-S) Insulation switch (MG) Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) Built-in Test button module (TBM) accessories Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) (option) Overcurrent trip alarm (OAL) Accessorie s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) connection (option) with Flying leads Enclosure Dustproof (S) ( I ) Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock (MI) Handle lock device Handle lock (HL) (HL-S) Lock cover () External (V) accessories External Door (S) (option) operating handle (R) Mounted on breaker (F) Insulating Between phase (BA-F) barrier To ground (BA-G) Large (TC-L) Small (TC-S) Terminal cover Transparent (TTC) for rear connection (BTC) for plug-in (PTC) Automatic tripping device Trip button CE marking 4 Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Note 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ) : Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.) : Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 4: Specify if for CE marking ~0 adjustable 00~0 adjustable Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type (0) 00 0 (0) 00 0 (0) 00 0 (0) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Button Button Button Button /1 4/4(/) 1 4/4(/) 1 / /1 4/4(/) 1 /(/) 1 / / /(/) 1 /(/) 1 / Thermalmagnetimagnetic Thermal- Electronic Electronic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Rated operational voltage - 4V 00-4V Available voltage range 0~V ~V

27 H series 0 C series 0 S series 0 H series 0 S series 00 H series 00 NV0-REW NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV00-SEW NV00-HEW 00~0 adjustable ~0 adjustable 00~0 adjustable 0~00 adjustable 0~00 adjustable 4 4 Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type ( ) Button ( ) Button Button ( ) Button ( ) Button Button ( ) Button 1/ 1/ 1/7 /1 /1 / 4/4 / / 4/4 / / / / / 4/4 / / / / / Electronic Thermalmagnetimagnetic Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 4

28 . Detailed Specifications Motor-Protection s Frame A 0 MB0-CS MB0-SW MB-CW MB-SW MB-SW MB-SW 00/0V 0/4V 00/0V 0/4V A A kw kw kw kw 00/0V 0/4V 00/0V 0/4V 00/0V 0/4V 00/0V 0/4V A A A A kw kw kw kw kw kw kw kw Rated current In (Amp.) (1) Rated motor capacity: kw () Reference ambient temperature C () () (4 C for marine applications) () () (1).7 7. (1.) (0.) (1.). Number of poles (for single phase) Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) V 1./1. (41V)./1./1 7./4 /1 /1 lec (lcu/lcs) AC 0V 1./1. (0V) / / 7./4 0/1 0/1 0V./ (V) 7./4 7./4 1/ / / a ca c a b 9 1 b c ca 7 9 Mass of front-connection type (kg) Rated shortcircuit breaking capacities (ka) Overall dimensions (mm) Connection method Front connection (F) Crimp contact Crimp contact Crimp contact Crimp contact Crimp contact Crimp contact Rear connection (B) Round stud (assembled in) Round stud Round stud Round stud Flat stud Flat stud Plug-in (PM) Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.

29 . Detailed Specifications UL Listed Products Frame A 1 NF-CWU NF-CWU NF-SWU NF-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW 0 NF-SKW 00 NF-SLW Photo Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C (IEC0 C) () (1) (1) Number of poles Rated voltage (V AC) Y/77 00Y/47 00Y/47 00Y/47 00Y/47 00Y/47 00Y/47V Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) UL 49 JIS C 01- IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V Y/77V V 14 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) V /4 / / 1/1 0V 7./4 / 7./4 1/9 0/0 0/0 / 4V / 1/ 7./4 /1 / / / AC 41V / 1/9 7./4 0/1 / / / 0V / 1/9 7./4 0/1 / / / 0V / 1/9 7./4 0/1 / / / / (/) ( ) 0/0 (/) ( ) 4/4 (/) ( ) 4/4 (/) ( ) 4/4 (/) ( ) / (4/4) ( ) / 0/0 4/4 4/4 4/4 / 0V 0/1 /1 1/ / / / / / (/) ( ) / DC V 7./4 / 1/ 0/0 0/0 0/0 Compatible to AC/DC 1 Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Overall dimensions (mm) a b ca c a b c ca Mass of front-connection type (kg) Connection method Accessories (option) Front connection Screw terminal Solderless terminal (box) Busbar terminal Alarm switch Auxiliary switch Shunt trip Under-voltage trip Vertical lead-wire terminal unit Mechanical interlock (F) (SL) (BAR) (AL) (AX) (SHT) (UVT) (SLT) (MI) External accessories (option) Handle lock device Operating handle Insulating barrier Terminal Large cover Small (HL) F S V (IB) (TC-L) (TC-S) 4 IEC mm rail fixture Supplied standardly Automatic tripping device Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Hydraulicmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic adjustable magnetic Thermal- adjustable Thermalmagnetic Thermalmagnetic adjustable Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped TÜV type approval Notes: 1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible to both AC and DC. Specifications for products with a CE mark differ from those for general-purpose products. Details will be available upon request. Use two poles among the three poles in the case of three-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the models of NF-CWU, NF-SWU and NF-CWU to be used for up to 0 V DC and the models of NF-SFW, NF-SJW, and NF-HJW to be used for up to 0 V DC. 4 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP0 (finger protection) structure. In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/). Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed. The operating characteristics of breakers are different between AC and DC (JIS and IEC only). Line Load

30 . Detailed Specifications Miniature Circuit s Type BH BH-P Frame (A) Photo Number of poles 1 1 Rated current (A) a t ambient temperature C,,,, Rated voltage (V) AC 0/0 DC 1 0/0 1 Breaking capacity (ka) sym. IEC 09 AC0/0V AC0V DC1V 1 1 Type of instantaneous operation Type C ( In <, < In) a 7 7 Dimensions (mm) a b ca c b 9 74 c ca Mass (kg) C lamp terminal Plug-in (line) Clamp (load) Connection 1 Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic Optional accessories T erminal cover M ounting plate T erminal base Lock cover A pproved by L R, GL, NK L R, BV, AB, GL, NK 1. If reguired Solderless terminal can be supplied. (BH : Line and Load side, BH-P : Load side only) 7

31 Type BH-S M BH-S M Photo Number of poles 1 1 Rated current (A) at ambient temperature C,,1,0,(), 0,,,0,1,0,(), 0,,,0 1,0,(), 0,,,0,,1,0,(), 0,,,0,1,0,(), 0,,,0 1,0,(), 0,,,0 Rated voltage (V) AC DC 0/ / Breaking capacity (ka) sym. IEC 09 AC0/0V AC0V DC1V 1 1 Type of instantaneous operation Types B,C,D a 7 7 Dimensions (mm) a b ca c b 9 9 c ca 7 7 Mass (kg) Clamp terminal Connection 1 Automatic tripping device Optional accessories Terminal cover Mounting plate Handle lock Thermal, magnetic L ock cover A pproved by 1. If required Solderless terminal can be supplied (Line and Load side). Type B ( In <, In), Type C ( In <, In), Type D ( In <, 0 In)

32 . Detailed Specifications Miniature Circuit s Type BH-PS M BH-PS M9 Photo Number of poles 1 1 Rated current (A) at ambient temperature C,1,0, 0,,,0,1,0, 0,,,0 1,0, 0,,,0,,1,0,(),,,,0,1,0,(),,,,0,1,0,(),,,,0 Rated voltage (V) AC DC 0/ / Breaking capacity (ka) sym. IEC 09 AC0/0V AC0V 9 9 DC1V 1 Type of instantaneous operation Types B,C,D a 7 7 Dimensions (mm) a b ca c b 1. c ca Mass (kg) Plug-in (line) Clam p (load) Connection Automatic tripping device Optional accessories Terminal cover Terminal base Lock cover Handle lock Thermal, magnetic A pproved by LR Type B ( In <, In), Type C ( In <, In), Type D ( In <, 0 In) 9

33 MCB BH-D (IEC 09) BH-DN (IEC 09) Photo Number of poles 1 Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C,,1,1,0,,,,,,,1,1,0,,,,,,,1,1,0,,,,, 4 (+N) (1+N),1,1,0,,,,,1,1,0,,,,, (1+N),,1,0 Rated voltage (VAC) 0/ Breaking capacity (ka) sym. (IEC09) Tripping characteristics Dimensions (mm) a b ca c Type B, C, D a 1 4 b 7 c ca Mass (kg) Connection Automatic tripping device, Type D (In, 0In) Solderless Thermal,magneti c Optional accessories Insulating barrier 1 pc pcs RCCB BV-D (IEC ) 7 0. pcs RCBO 0 Type B, C Type C pc BV-DN (IEC 9) Photo Photo Number of poles a b ca c (1+N) Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C,, Rated voltage (VAC ) 0 0/0 Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) 0, 00 Max. operating time (s) at I 0.04 Pulsating current sensitivity Rated conditional short-circuit current (ka) Type AC Dimensions (mm) a b c ca Mass (kg) 0. C onnection solderless 4(+N) 7 0. Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C Rated voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time (s) ati n Pulsating current sensitivity Breaking capacity (ka) sym. (IEC9) Tripping characteristics DImension (mm) Mass (kg) Connection Automatic tripping device Option a b ca c a b c ca (1+N),,1,0,, 0 0,, Type AC 4. Type C 0.19 Solderless Thermal,magnetic Over voltage release (0V±%) Isolating switch KB-D (IEC 0947-) Photo Number of poles 1 Utilization category Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C a b ca c,, 0 Rated voltage (VAC) 0 0 Short time withstand current (A) 0 In, Short-circuit making capacity (A) 0 In Dimensions (mm) a 1 4 b 7 c ca Mass (kg) Connection Optional accessories Insulating barrier ACA class Solderless 1 pc pcs 4 (+N) 7 0. pcs 0

34 . Detailed Specifications ELRs and ZCTs Earth-Leakage relays Type Model name of ZCT combined (Note ) Hole diameter mm Electrical self-hold type NV-ZBA ZT1B ZT0B ZTB ZT0B ZT0B ZTB Mechanical self-hold type NV-ZSA ZT1B ZT0B ZTB Interchangeable leakage relay (Note 1) ZT0B ZT0B ZTB Harmonic surge ready Electrical self-hold type NV-ZHA ZT1B ZT0B ZTB ZT0B ZT0B ZTB Harmonic surge ready Mechanical self-hold type NV-ZLA ZT1B ZT0B ZTB ZT0B ZT0B ZTB Photo Control voltage AC V JIS UL/JIS UL/CE Built-in contact High speed type Delay type Delay type JIS UL/JIS (Note ) UL/CE (Note ) Rated sensitivity current ma Max. operating time s Rated sensitivity current ma s (Note 4) Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s Rated sensitivity current ma Max. operating time s Rated sensitivity current ma Max. operating time s (Note 4) Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s Rated sensitivity current ma Max. operating time s ati n Rated sensitivity current ma Max. operating time s ati n (Note 4) Inertial non-operating time s ati n Earth-leakage indication Resetting method Configuration Continuous current capacity A Contact capacity A Connection Front Rear Standard attachment (Front connection) Mass kg Relay External Terminal cover accessories Mounting hook for IEC mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture Conforming standard High speed type High speed Delay type High speed type Phase line type Max. consumption VA US UL standard (UR certified) Canada CSA standard European CE marking VAC VAC 4VDC selectable selectable cosφ= selectable selectable selectable Electric type (LED) Push button or control power switch off 1c Clamp terminal 0. (TC-ZBA) (DIN-ZBA) cosφ=0.4 L/R=0.007 VAC VAC 41VAC 0VDC VDC 00VDC selectable 41 selectable selectable cosφ= φ4w, φw, 1φW, 1φW 00 0 selectable selectable ( selectable) selectable Mechanical type (button) Push button (conbined with earth-leakage indicator) 1a1c cosφ=0.4 L/R= Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Mounting screw 0.4 (TC-ZSA) Note (1) Interchargeable leakage relay can be freely combined with relay and our ZCT. However, 0mA sensitivity product (excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can be combined with only ZT1B, ZT0B and ZTB. () Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and JIS together. For voltage indication in JIS, -00V changeover for -V changeover, 00-41V changeover for -4V changeover, 40V for V are described together. When ordering, specify "UL/JIS". () Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and CE together. For voltage indication in CE, -0V changeover for -V changeover, 0-4V changeover for -4V selectable are described together. When ordering, specify "UL/CE". (4) When the operating time are 0. and 0.4 seconds, 0. and 1.0 seconds, and 1. seconds, the relay operates between 0.1 and 0.4, between 0. and 1.0 seconds and between 1. and.0 seconds respectively. () Can be combined with interchangeable ZCT with primary conductor. Refer to the next page for detail. () It's not UL-certified. selectable 4 selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable Electric type (LED) Push button or control power switch off 1a1c cosφ=1 cosφ=0.4 VAC VAC 4VDC L/R=0.007 Use auxiliary relay for AC41V contact. Clamp terminal Clamp terminal 0.4 (TC-ZSA)(Note ) UL Recognized component (File No.E19) LR(Certified No.) Declaration for conformity IEC0947- AnnexB EN0947- AnnexB Control voltage V V 41V Control voltage V V 4V V selectable 4 selectable VAC VAC VAC 0VDC Available voltage range 0~1V ~V 0~V Available voltage range 0~1V ~4V 04~V ~V selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable Mechanical type (button) Push button (conbined with earthleakage indicator) 1a1c cosφ=1 1 Clamp terminal Clamp terminal cosφ=0.4 L/R= (TC-ZSA)(Note ) UL Recognized component (File No.E19) LR(Certified No.) Declaration for conformity IEC0947- AnnexB EN0947- AnnexB Remark (1) Relays with rate shown in the ( ) in the space for rate are manufactured by your order. () CE marking is for self-statement for the purpose of interrupting NF when ground-fault occurs by combining with our NF with CE marking (voltage tripping device). () NV-ZBA/ZSA (4) NV-ZHA/ZLA Example of applicable circuit voltage 1V V 00 0 V V Example of applicable circuit voltage 1 V V V 40 V 1

35 Interchangeable ZCT Type ZT1B ZT0B Aperture diameter (mm) Mass (kg) Rated short time current (peak value) Dimensions (mm) a b c d a e b c ZTB ZT0B ZT0B ZTB d e ZCT aperture diameter and permissible wire size ZCT aperture diameter (mm) Max. permissible 00V rated wire size in mm (current in amperes ) 1øw P olyvinyl chloride insulated wire 14 () 0 (17) 1 (9) () 00 (99) 00 (11) 1øw øw C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable () (1) 0 (0) () 0 () 00 (11) P olyvinyl-chloride insulated wire (1) (1) (9) () 0 (4) 7 (9) C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable () (1) 0 (0) 00 () (70) 00 (11) ø4w P olyvinyl-chloride insulated wire (1) (1) (9) 1 (9) () 00 (99) C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable 14 () (1) () () 0 () Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors Type ZTA00A ZTA0A Number of poles ZTA000A Rated voltage (VAC) 00 Rated short time current (ka) (peak value ) a a b 9 ba 4 94 c c ca ca b ba ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors Frame (A) Type ZBA ZSA ZHA ZLA Interchangeable ELR and interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors Number of poles NV-ZBA00 NV-ZSA00 NV-ZHA00 NV-ZLA00 Rated voltage (VAC) 00 Rated short time current (ka) (peak value ) a a b 9 0 ba 4 94 c c ca ca Mass (kg) b ba High-speed type C ontrol voltage (VAC) R ated current sensitivity (ma) M ax. operating time (s) Inertial non-operating time (s) ZBA 00 0 ZSA, ZBA Specification of ELRs Time-delay type High-speed Time-delay type ZSA ZHA ( ) (at l n) (at l n) ZLA (at l n) (at l n).

36 . Detailed Specifications Circuit Protectors CIRCUIT PROTECTORS TYPE CP Frame (A) 0 Type CP0-BA CP-S Photo Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Rated current (A) Rated short-circuit capacity (ka) AC-DC common use Reverse connection Rated short time current (for switch only type) Mass (kg) Accessories Connection UL77 CSA C. No. 11 IEC 094 EN 094 GB (Icn) JIS C 4 (Icn) EN IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Rated ambient temperature ( C) Operating characteristics Mode of tripping Method of operation Trip-free behaviour Inertial delay (ID) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt trip (SHT) Terminal cover (TC) Flushpanel brackets (FP) Back facing wiring termnal (BT) Lock cover () Accessory terminal cover (TC) Main body Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch AC (V) Rated voltage (V) DC (V) AC DC Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC kA at V.kA at V.kA at 1V./.kA at 0V./.kA at V (Medium, Slow type: AC only) Main body method Srface, IEC rail Flush panel (option) International standard UL(cURus), CCC kA at V 1kA at V 1kA at 0V 1. The P products are use for AC only.. Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above.. In the pole with a shunt tripping apparatus, an over-current tripping element becomes nothing. (Switched type shunt tripping type) 4. In the case of back wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with ratings 0A or less, or 0A.. UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.. It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV. 7. In case of DC use, only DCV is available.. Specify if for DC use when ordering. 9. Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.). Connection is male tub terminal only. 11. CP0-BA only. Remark (1) The non-standard conditions products are also made by your order. (Low temperature, Moisture-fungus treatment of the t kind, Moisture-fungus treatment of the nd kind, Corrosion resistive.) () Although buzzing sound may be made if an instantaneous type becomes 0% or more of rated current when it is used by AC, there is no problem on a performance. Therefore, when used in a quiet environment, please select after taking this point into consideration. () Please use it in a circumference environment without temperature, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact. And please do not use it in a circuit with inrush current, and a circuit with harmonics. It may become unnecessary action or trouble. 1kA at 0V Trip-free (IEC094) (Medium, Slow, Fast type:ac only) (1c) 7 (1c) (for parallel and relay type:ac only) Male tub terminal.mm (#) [Screw terminal M4 (series type only)] Male tub terminal.mm (#1) Panel UL(UR) 9, Operating characteris is Medium type (M) only. EN094 : TUV approval CE Marking EN094 : TUV approval The rated current, 0.A, EN0947- : Self-declaration A, A and 7A are not applied..ka at 0V.kA at V.kA at 0V.kA at 0V.kA at V./.kA at 0V (T) Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Medium type (M), (MD) Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM] Fast type (F) (1c) (1c) (for relay type) 4, 0A or less : Screw terminal M4 0A : Screw termnal M Screw terminal M. S-type (IEC094) 1kA at V (T) Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD) Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Medium type (M), (MD) Slow type (S), (SD) Fast type (F), (FD) 1.kA at 0V.kA at V 1kA at V (1kA at 0V) 7 1.kA at V.kA at 1V 1kA at 1V (1kA at V) 7 ACV /0Hz 10A 0.0s AC1V /0Hz 0A 0.0s DCV 0A 0.0s DC1V 0A 0.0s 1kA at V : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]

37 . Special Purpose s Mag Only, DC-Use And DSN-Type Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers) NF-CW/SW/HW NF1-CW/SW/HW AC, DC AC, DC Fixed NF-SW/HW AC, DC Rated current x NF-CW/SW/HW AC, DC Adjustable NF0-CW/SW NF0-CW/SW NF1-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF00-SEW NF00-SDW NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SDW AC, DC AC, DC AC DC AC AC DC High: Rated current x Low: Rated current x4 (AC) High: Rated current x1 Low: Rated current x. (DC) High: Rated current x Low: Rated current x High: 000A Low: 00A High: Rated current x Low: Rated current x High: Rated current x Low: Rated current x High: 000A Low: 00A Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S and H series breakers.. For more detail, contact your dealer. DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary DC breakers are suitable for low voltages, special voltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages in excess of VDC. s for V are all models. The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the S series of same-designation breakers. Type Number of poles Rated voltage (VDC) Rated breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Notes: 1: Time constant: ms or below. Type Number of poles Rated voltage (VDC) Interrupting capacity (ka) Instantaneous trip current (min.) NF-SW NF1-SW NF-SW NF-SW NF0-SW NF0-SW NF00-SDW NF1-SDW NF0-SDW /1 / 0/ 0/ / / / /0 /0 DC side These breakers are designed as thyristor-leonard system DC-side breakers. They protect the thyristor from short circuiting when there is a power or Wiring diagram for DC-usage. Wiring diagram for DC use. Note: The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the one shown here. communication failure. (Mag-Only breakers can also be used for this role.) Use these breakers in combination with fast fuses for even greater protection. NF1-SW NF-SW NF-SW NF0-SW NF0-SW NF00-SDW NF1-SDW NF0-SDW times rated current times rated current times rated current 0A 0A A 0A 00A DSN-type switches These are standard MCCBs without the automatic tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six times the rated current. The appearance, size, drilling plan and available accessories are all identical to similar type standard S and C series MCCBs. Type DSN0-CS DSN-CW DSN1-CW DSN-CW DSN0-CW DSN0-CW DSN00-CW Rated current (A) Number of poles R ated voltage (AC/DC) 40/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 00/ 00/ 00/ Max. switching current (AC/DC) / 7/1 7/ 10/ 0/0 70/17 0/000 Type Rated current (A) Number of poles Rated voltage (AC/DC) Max. switching current (AC/DC) DSN-SW DSN-SS DSN-SW DSN1-SW DSN1-SGW DSN-SGW DSN-SW DSN-SGW DSN0-SW DSN0-SW DSN00-SW DSN0-SW DSN1-SW DSN0-SW / /1 0/ / /00 /00 0/ /00 / / / / / / 19/0 00/1 7/1 7/ 7/1 90/0 10/ 10/ 0/0 70/17 0/ /0 70/1 900/00 4

38 . Special Purpose s 0Hz-Use, Instantaneous And Generator Protection 0Hz-Use MCCBs Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 0Hz circuit. When standard MCCBs are used in the high frequency circuit (eq. 0Hz), the instantaneous chracteristic will be shifted higher. 0Hz use MCCBs are reccomended to use in 0Hz circuit. Specifications The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the standard S and H series of same-designation breakers. Type Rated current (A) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) Rated breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu / Ics) V 0V 4V 0V 0V Note *1. Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix) NF1-SW NF1-HW NF-SW NF-HW NF0-SW NF0-SEW NF0-SW *1 NF0-SEW NF00-SEW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW 1, 0,,,,, 0, 1, 0,,,,, 0, 1, 1 17, 00 1, 1 17, 00, 00, 00~ adjustable 0, 0 00~0 adjustable 0~00 adjustable 00~00 adjustable 00~0 adjustable /4 1/9 /1 0/1 / / 0/1 / / / 1/ /1 0/1 / / 0/ /1 /1 / / 0/0 4/4 4/4 / / 0/0 4/4 / / / 0/0 4/4 / / / 0/0 4/4 / / / 0/0 4/4 / / /1 / /4 /4 1/ /1 / /4 /4 1/ Low-Instantaneous MCCBs Low-Inst. MCCBs for Discrimination When a power fuse (PF) is used for high-voltage proection, make sure that the MCCB on the secondary side is compatible. Type NF1-CW NF1-SW NF-CW NF-SW NF0-CW Number of poles 4 4 Rated current (A),, 0,, 1 1, 0,,,, 0,,1 1, 1, 17 00,, 1, 1, 17 00,,, 00, 0 Specifications PF Tr1 MCCB 1 Time MCCB operating characteristic curve Low-inst. MCCBs PF short-time tolerance capacity Instantaneous trip (% of rated current) 00 0 MCCB Current Fig. 4.1 Low-inst. MCCB characteristics Remarks: 1. Ensure compatibility with motor, etc., before use to prevent accidental tripping at start up.. Specify rated current and tripping characteristic.. There are no short time delay characteristics. The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity, accessories, etc., are all identical to the standard instantaneous trip breakers of the same designation. Generator-Protection MCCBs These breakers are designed for generator protection. Specifications Type NF1-SGW NF1-HGW NF-SGW NF-HGW Number of poles Rated current (A) adjustable adjustable 1~ adjustable 1~ adjustable Instantaneous trip (% of rated current) 00 1 at 1% of rated current (s) Rated insulation voltage (V) 1~ 1 ACV / 0/0 / 0/0 Rated breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu / Ics) AC0V AC4V AC0V 0/0 / / / / 7/7 0/0 / / / / 7/7 AC0V / / / / 1: These MCCBs operating characteristic must be adjusted as follows. STD (Is setting) LTD: minimum setting (TL = setting)

39 . Special Purpose s MDU s Measuring Display Unit (MDU) Energy management becomes possible by measurement and display of load current, line voltage, electric power, electric energy, harmonic current (rd, th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 1th, 1th, 17th, 19th, and total) and power factor. MDU with pulse output option can output pulse of electric energy. MDU with CC-Link option can transfer measured data to open network CC-Link. When a circuit breaker outputs an alarm, LED on MDU turns on. PAL : pre-alarm OVER : over current When the circuit breaker has tripped, fault cause and fault current stored in EEPROM. It makes investigation of cause and restoration of power line possible. The max. demand value of load current, line voltage, total harmonic current, electric power and electric energy (hourly value), are stored in EEPROM. And MDU with CC-Link option can store the outbreak time of these. It makes easy finding of peak time of power consumption possible. NF0-SEP with MDU Application type Type Frame size Rated current In (Amp.) Load current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value) Line voltage (Present value, maximum value) Harmonic current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value) Electric power (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value) Electric energy, electric energy (hourly value), maximum electric energy (hourly value) Measured Power factor (Present value) and Rated measuring current displayed Accuracy of measuring current (Limit deviation tolerance) value Rated measuring voltage Accuracy of measuring voltage (Limit deviation tolerance) Maximum measuring current (Note1.) Maximum measuring harmonic current (Note1.) Maximum measuring voltage (Note1.) Measurement range of power factor Fault current/cause (Note1.) (Note.) Overload and short-circuit (Note.) Alarm LED indication Phasing line Electric energy accumulated pulse output (option) (Note.) CC-Link transmission (option) (Note.) (Note4.) Control power (Allowable voltage range ~1%) MDU installation Panel (Note7.) Pre-alarm (PAL) (Power supply AC/DC-V required) Alarm contact output (option) Trip indicator (TI) (Power supply AC/DC-V required) NF-SW with MDU 1, 1, 17, 00,, A ±.A 0A A The fault cause: AL is displayed. The fault current: It displays it up to times the rated current. ( AL switch for the MDU transmission (option) is necessary. ) Molded-Case Circuit NF0-SEP NF0-HEP with MDU adjustable 0A ±A AC4V ±11V 00A 0A ACV Lead 0.0~.0~0.0 Lag(%), The value of power factor is reference value if less than %. PAL, OVER φw, 1φW ( poles breaker), φ4w (4 poles breaker) AC/DC-V 1VA (Note.) PAL NF0-SEP NF0-HEP with MDU adjustable 0A ±1.7A A 0A NF00-SEP NF00-HEP with MDU adjustable 00A ±0A The fault cause: Overload L and short-circuit SI are displayed. The fault current: It displays it up to 1 times the maximum rated current. PAL, OAL 0A 00A Note1. When the input becomes more than the measurement maximum value, the current, the voltage, the harmonic current, and the fault current display the measurement maximum value. It does the blinking display. (However, when the fault occurs, the fault cause of and the fault current measurement value do the blinking display though it is less than measurement maximum value.) When electric power becomes more than the measurement maximum value of or either the current or the voltage becomes more than its measurement maximum value, the electric power does the blinking display. Note. Either of overload (L) or short-circuit (SI) is displayed. It doesn t display it at the same time. Note. Pulse output option and CC-Link option cannot be attached at the same time. Note4. When the breaker type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link is Ver.1.. When the panel type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link cable (FANC-SB) used for the terminal stand from the surface of MDU to the other side is CC-Link Ver Note. When control power supplied to MDU, then rushed current transitionally, max. Apeak, 1ms (at VAC). Note. The module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker. Pre-alarm (PAL) output function can set Self-holding or Auto reset. For function of alarm contact output (PAL, OAL), MDU and the circuit breaker must be connected with the mutuality and the control power must be supplied to MDU and alarm contact output module. Note7. In the case of panel, the part set (the panel holder plate, the screws, the nuts and the MDU connection cable) is packed. And, the MDU connection cable is m (standard). (MDU connection cable can be specified by 0.m, m, and as many as m.)

40 . Special Purpose s MDU s Measuring Display Unit i Numerical display LED (digit)!4alarm display LED o Mode selection LED!0 Phase selection LED!1 Measured value selection LED MODE PHASE VALUE FUNCTION! Function selection LED! Unit display LED (Characters light up.) u y active LED (UP) switch Displayed items and functions are changed by pushing q~r switch. Selected item is shown by LED (below o -!). (Ex. Phase selection 1 N 1 ) / switchy is active when adjustment or reset operation is required. ( active LEDu is turned on) There may be functions which cannot be operated depending upon the specifications. The invalid function is skipped. y (DOWN) switch q Mode selection switch w Phase selection switch e Measure value selection switch r Function selection switch t ENTER switch Installed on the circuit breaker Installed on the panel 7

41 NF-SW with MDU Front-Connection Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) M bolt (Hex-soket) φ. 1 1 Trip button Trip button MDU terminal cover Neutral pole MDU MDU terminal cover 0 φ. 4 1 φ4. max. (Bus t max.=7) Bus drilling for direct connection M4 0.7 taps or φ Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle Mounting plate t max.. Stud can be rotated Insulating tube MDU (Load side of breaker has given the space to pass wires to the terminal.) 7 φ. Connection allowance R1 1 R1 7 MDU 0 φ φ9 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube φ4 M4 0.7 taps or φ φ4. < >. <Panel > CC-Link ; only MDU panel NF-SW with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output) MDU panel MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal M4 screw Upper side Operation/display side 7 1. Panel Panel holder plate Terminal PE screw (M4) Terminal block MDU connector M nut Panel thickness 1~.mm 7 MDU display part R. 7 Front panel cutout Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate cm or more from the distribution line. For the set installation 19 <Panel > < > 4 1 L L1 Control power 1 4 No transmission Pulse output Terminal block M4 screw M. screw Terminal cover M nut In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier too. Control power L1L 1 4 No transmission Pulse output 1 4 FG FG

42 . Special Purpose s MDU s NF-SW with MDU (CC-Link) MDU panel Upper side Operation/display side M screw Terminal PE screw(m4) 4.. Terminal block 7. MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. Panel Panel holder plate MDU connector M screw Terminal cover 4 7. M screw M nut 9 M nut Panel thickness 1~.mm 7 MDU display part R. 7 7 Front panel cutout Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate cm or more from the distribution line. For the set installation 1 1 In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier too. MDU Terminal <Panel > < > Terminal block Control power Figure of the breaker is removed the terminal cover L L1 1 4 SLD DG DB DA 7 SLD DG DB DA L1L Control power FG SLD DG DB DA 9

43 NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP with MDU Front-Connection Insulating barrier (removable) Mounting hole 1 4 Conductor t max.= 94. Trip button φ1. 47 φ7 194 PE φ14 M1 bolt MDU terminal cover 1 Current indication LED OVER PAL MDU % Neutral pole φ. Conductor t max.= Conductor drilling for direct connection M taps or φ7 Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle. Mounting plate Stud can be rotated MDU Eddy-current heat-reducing slit (Load side of breaker has given the space to pass wires to the terminal.) Connection allowance 0 0 M taps or φ R R 11 φ1 M1 bolt 1 7. M breaker screw Insulating tube 7 φ (9) 11 < > 7 11 <Panel > 9 Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP, NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP, NF00-SEP, NF00-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output) MDU panel MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal Figure of the breaker is removed the terminal cover. Upper side Operation/display side M4 screw M4 screw 1. Terminal block Panel Terminal PE screw (M4). 0 Panel holder plate MDU connector 9 M. screw Terminal cover M nut Panel thickness 1~.mm M nut 7 MDU display part R. 7 For the set installation Front panel cutout Type NF0-SEP NF0-HEP NF0-SEP NF00-SEP NF0-HEP NF00-HEP Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate cm or more from the distribution line. A 74 B A B In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier too. <Panel > < > 4 1 L L1 Control power 1 4 No transmission Pulse output Terminal block Control power No transmission Pulse output L1L FG FG

44 . Special Purpose s MDU s NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP, NF00-SEP, NF00-HEP with MDU Front-Connection 1 Trip button PE Insulating barrier (removable) Mounting hole Current indication LED OVER PAL MDU % MDU terminal cover 0 1 Conductor t max AF t 00AF t Neutral pole φ14 M1 bolt φ φ 00AF 00AF AF 00AF 4 Dimension of terminal directly connected to conductor φ. 00AF 4 00AF 1 Conductor t max. 00AF t 00AF t Conductor drilling for direct connection M taps or φ7 4 Rear-Connection Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle. Mounting plate Connection allowance Stud can be rotated MDU M taps or φ7 Eddy-current heat-reducing slit (Load side of breaker has given the space to pass wires to the terminal.) R R φ1 M1 bolt 1 M breaker screw 1 φ4 () < > <Panel > Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP, NF0-SEP, NF0-HEP, NF00-SEP, NF00-HEP with MDU (CC-Link) MDU panel MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal Figure of the breaker is removed the terminal cover. Upper side 4.1 Operation/display side M screw Terminal PE screw(m4) Terminal block 7. Panel Panel holder plate MDU connector 4 M screw 7. Terminal cover M screw M nut 9 M nut Panel thickness 1~.mm 7 MDU display part R. 7 Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate cm or more from the distribution line. 7 Front panel cutout Type NF0-SEP NF0-HEP NF0-SEP NF00-SEP NF0-HEP NF00-HEP For the set installation A 9 7 B A B In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier too. <Panel > < > Terminal block Control power L L1 1 4 SLD DG DB DA 7 SLD DG DB DA L1L FG SLD DG DB DA Control power 41

45 4. Connection Method 1. Connection Types Table 4-1: Connection Types Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Solderless terminal Rear connection (B) The front connection model will be delivered unless otherwise specified. Notice, however, that you can convert the front connection model to other types (excluding the plug-in) by using an appropriate connection component, which is separately available. Plug-in (PM) Appearance. Connection Accessories Table 4-: List of Connection Accessories 1 Solderless terminal (SL) Rear studs (B-ST) Plug-in (PM) 1 NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW NF-SW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW NF-SW/HW NV-SEP/HEP NF1-CW/SW NF1-HW NF1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV1-CW/SW/HW NV1-RW P P 4P P P P SL-1SW4L SL-1SW4G 4 SL-1SWL SL-1SWG 4 ST-0SW ST-0SW ST-0SW4 ST-1SP ST-1SW ST-1HW ST-1SW PM-0SW PM-0SW PM-0SW4 PM-1SP PM-1SW PM-1HW PM-1SW PM-1UW 4 NF1-SW/HW, NV1-SW/HW 4P SL-1SW4L SL-1SW4G 4 ST-1SW4 PM-1SW4 NF-CW/SW/HW, NF-SW/HW P SL-SW4L SL-SW4G ST-SW PM-SW NF-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NF-SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW NV-RW P SL-SWL SL-SWG SL-UWL SL-UWG ST-SW ST-UW PM-SW NF-SW/HW, NF-SW/HW, NV-SW/HW/SEW/HEW NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF1-SGW/HGW NF-RGW/UGW, NF1-RGW/UGW NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF1-SGW/HGW NF-RGW/UGW, NF1-RGW/UGW NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF1-SGW/HGW NF-UGW, NF1-UGW NF0-CW/SW NF0-CW/SW/SEW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW NF0-HEW/REW, NV0-HEW/REW NF0-SW/SEW, NV0-SEW NF0-HEW, NV0-HEW NF0-CW/SW NF0-CW/SW/SEW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW NF0-HEW/REW, NV0-HEW NF0-SW/SEW, NV0-SEW NF0-HEW NF00-SDW NF00-CEW/SEW, NV00-SEW NF00-HEW/REW, NV00-HEW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW 4P P P 4P P P P 4P 4P P P P 4P 4P P P P 4P 4P SL-SW4L SL-SW4G SL-GSW4 SL-GSW SL-GSW4 Notes: 1 You can use the plug-in terminal unit (PM) when the wiring of terminal units is required in advance, and the delivery of both the main body and the components at the same time, which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore specify the nonuse of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker. If safety device is necessary,please require. Connected wire size:.~mm 4 Connected wire size: ~mm Line Load Connected wire size: 14~9mm Connected wire size: ~1mm ST-SW4 ST-GSW ST-GSW ST-GSW4 ST-4SW ST-4SW ST-4SW4 ST-SW ST-SW ST-SW4 ST-SW ST-SW ST-SW4 PM-SW4 PM-GSWIP PM-GUW PM-GSWIP PM-GUW PM-GSWIP4 PM-4SW PM-4SW PM-4SW4 PM-SW PM-SW PM-SW4 PM-SW PM-SW PM-SW4. Connection of Line and Load The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is (a) normal connection shown on the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection, which may lead to the decrease in breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models (except NF models with MDU). NF-C series, NF-S series, NF-H series, NF-U series, MB series, C S H series of NV0~00A Frame Reverse connection is allowed for the standard models. Load Line Normal connection (a) Reserve connection (b) Normal and reverse connection methods 4

46 . Accessories Internal Accessories 1. Accessories Table -1: Accessories Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type of accessories AL Alarm switch A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker. NF-C S H U, Auxiliary switch A switch that electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker. NV-C S H U and MB series AX SHT UVT EAL TBM MG PAL OAL OFF or ON Trip OFF or Trip ON Shunt trip A Note: (1) Models NV-SEW/HEW are excluded. Over current, short circuit trip or on or off Ground-fault trip Undervoltage trip A Earth-leakage alarm switch A Test button module This Insulation switch The Pre-alarm module Overcurrent trip alarm switch. Switch Operation and Rating Table -: AL Switch Operation Circuit breaker status Table -: AX Switch Operation Circuit breaker status Table -4: EAL Switch Operation Circuit breaker status A frame or less 0A frame or more A frame or less 0A frame or more Table -: MG Switch Operation Circuit breaker status device that electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote distance. Permissible working voltages are to 1% of the AC rated voltage or to 1% of the DC rated voltage. device that automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered. Working voltages are to % of the UVT rated voltage. When the voltage recovers to % or higher, you can reset the device and put into operation. switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the earth leakage circuit breaker caused by a ground fault. If AF and less, This switch is available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). module allows you a remote testing by applying a voltage. An external sequence common to SHT can be used. (The standard configuration requires the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).) incorporation of this switch enables the measurement of insulation resistance between the terminals of the load with the circuit breaker being turned OFF. Indicates that the load current exceeds the pre-alarm setting current. Indicates that the breaker has been tripped by overcurrent or short-circuit current. AL switch contact AX switch contact EAL switch contact MG switch status 9/ALa (open) 9/ALb (closed) 9/ALc 9/ALa (closed) 9/ALb (open) 9/ALc 14/AXa (open) 1/AXb (closed) 11/AXc 14/AXa (closed) 1/AXb (open) 11/AXc EALa (open) EALc EALa (open) EALb (closed) EALc EALa (closed) EALc EALa (closed) EALb (open) EALc Table -: AL AX EAL Switch Rating (In case of EAL, 0AF and more) Switch type S V *1 X Note: *1. When DC use polarity must be considered. Please contact us for applications in the field of smaller current values. Table -7: EAL Switch Rating (AF and less) Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Resistive load AC Resistive load Inductive load A control power supply (compatible to and 00V AC) is required; see the diagram on the right showing its wiring. (The permissible range of voltage of the control power supply is 0 to 4V AC, and the power requirement is VA.) NF-C S H U and MB series NF-C S H U, (Note 1) NV-C S H U and MB series NV-C S H U NV-C S H U NV-C S H U Electronic Types Electronic Types (SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW) Current (A) Inductive load Voltage (V) DC Resistive load Current (A) Inductive load AC Current A Vertical lead-wire terminal unit EALa Indicator lamp (example) P Control power supply P1(EALc) OFF or Trip MG switch (open) ON MG switch (closed) 4

47 . Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories Left-side Right-side MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction Table -: Combinations of Accessories Series NF-C S H U, MB NV-C S H U Type Poles NF0-CS MB0-CS NF-SW NF-CW/SW/HW NF1-CW/SW NF-SW(P) NF-CW/SW/HW(P) NF1-CW(P), NF1-SW(P, 4P) NF1-HW, NF1-SGW/HGW NF1-RGW/UGW NF-SW/SGW/HW/HGW NF-CW/SW/HW NF-SGW/HGW NF-RGW/UGW MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW MB-SW, MB-SW NV-SW NV-CW/SW/HW NV1-CW/SW/HW NV-CW/SW/HW NV-SEW/HEW NV1-RW, NV-RW,,, 4, 4 (Note 7) NV0-CS (Note 7) AL 1 (Note 7) (Note 7) AX 1 AL + AX SHT or UVT product only (Note 7) 1 1 (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note 4) (Note ) AL + SHT or UVT AX + SHT or UVT (Note ) (Note ) Accessories AL + AX + SHT or UVT (Note 1) (Note ) MG (Note 7) AL + MG AX + MG (Note ) EAL (Note 9) TBM PAL Notes: (1) Second AX can substitute the AL on the left-pole. () Models with UVT require a UVT voltage module to be installed on the lead-wire terminal unit. (No such voltage module is required for SHT.) Part of UVT accessories is not of cassette type. (Details will be available upon request.) () UVTs for left-pole installation can be produced, if specified, for frame current values of 1A (excluding SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW). (4) SHT cannot be installed. () EALs are available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). Specify a control power supply of either or 00 V AC. () Models NV-SEW/HEW are not allowed to install the UVT device. (7) The standard lead drawing is performed laterally. Load drawing is also available. () Only the models with an SLT are available. EAL and PAL require a control power supply (shared - 00 VAC). For the 4 VDC TBM only, instruct us of a control voltage. (The standard shared voltage is - VAC/ - VDC.) (9) Models CE marking are not allowed to install the TBM device. Remarks: (1) Circled numbers indicate the order of installation. () Accessories of EAL, and TBM can be installed independent of installations of AL, AX, and MG. (Two units among EAL, and TBM cannot be installed at the same time.)

48 . Accessories Internal Accessories Left-side Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories Right-side MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction Type NF-C/S/H NF0-CW/SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF00-CEW/SDW NF00-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SDW NF-U NF0-UEW (P) NF0-UEW (4P), NF00-UEW Poles,, 4 Switch type S V AL AX SHT or UVT 1 1 AL + AX Accessories AL + SHT or UVT AX + SHT or UVT AL + AX + SHT or UVT PAL (contact output) Option for NF0-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (P) NF0-SEW/HEW/REW Option for NF0-UEW(4P) NF00-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW Option for NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW TI Option for NF0-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (P) NF0-SEW/HEW/REW Option for NF0-UEW(4P) NF00-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 4 The number within the circle shows the order of. 1. SHT and UVT are right-pole as standard. Please specify if left-pole is required.. UVT requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).. When more than three left-pole devices by SLT, or when a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special-order SLT is necessary. 4. When a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX, or AL + AX, the UVT voltage module is separate.. SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC~00V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker's right pole.). SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC~00V/DC~00V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker's right pole.)

49 Left-side Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories Right-side MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction Type NV-C/ S/H NV0-CW/SW NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW NV0-SEW/HEW Poles, 4 NV00-SEW/HEW Switch type S AL AX 1 1 SHT or UVT AL + AX Accessories AL + SHT or UVT 1 1 AX + SHT or UVT 1 1 AL + AX + SHT or UVT 1 1 MG AL + MG The number within the circle shows the order of. 1. UVT requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).. When more than three left-pole devices by SLT, or when a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special-order SLT is necessary.. When a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX. the UVT voltage module is separate. 4

50 . Accessories Internal Accessories Left-side Handle AL AX SHT or UVT Right-side MG EAL TBL PAL TI TBM Lead wire direction Type NV-C/ S/H NV0-CW/SW NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW NV0-SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW Poles, 4 Switch type S AX + MG AL + AX + MG EAL Accessories TBL TBM 1 1 PAL (contact output) Option for NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-SEW/HEW Option for NV00-SEW/HEW TI Option for NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-SEW/HEW Option for NV00-SEW/HEW The number within the circle shows the order of. 1. EAL, TBL, and TBM can be mounted regardless of the number of AL, AX, SHT, UVT and MG accessories. (However, two EALs, TBLs or TBMs cannot be mounted simultaneously.). The PAL s dimensions and specifications change for the NF-C/S and NV-C/S series. 1. SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC-00V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker s right pole.). SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC-00V/DC-00V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker s right pole.) 47

51 Left-side Handle AL AX SHT or UVT Right-side Type NF-C/S/H NF-SWU NF-CWU NF-SWU NF-SWU NF-CWU NF-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW NF-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW Poles Switch type S S (Note ) AL (Note ) AX (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note ) SHT or UVT Accessories AL + AX 1 1 (Note 4) 1 1 (Note 4) 1 1 (Note 4) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) AL + SHT or UVT (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) AX + SHT or UVT AL + AX + SHT or UVT (Note 1) (Note 4) (Note 1) (Note 4) (Note ) (Note 4) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) (Note 1) (Note ) (Note ) (Note 7) Notes: (1) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.) () If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.) No cassette is attached to the UVT. () If a UVT is used, the UVT voltage module is externally installed. (The SHT requires no voltage module). (4) The nd AX can be installed instead of the AL on the left pole. () The standard of the SHT and the UVT is performed on the right pole. If on the left pole is required, instruct us. (The UVTs for interlocks are mounted on the left pole.) () We can manufacture the SLTs used when or more accessories are installed on the left pole and the SLTs used when the AL and the AX are attached on the same pole that is attached with the SHT or the UVT at your order. (7) If a UVT is used and an AL, an AX or an AL + an AX are attached to the same pole that is attached with the UVT, the UVT voltage module is separately installed. Remarks: (1) Encircled numbers show the order of. 4

52 . Accessories Internal Accessories 4. Shunt Trip (SHT) Table -9: Standard Coil Rating Series (0) A Frame 1A Frame (NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW are excluded) A Frame NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW Cut-off switch Voltage (V) AC- 0- (Compatible to and 0Hz. ) DC-1 Input power requirement (VA) (Note 1) AC DC 0 (ms) (Note ) 1 or less NF-C S H U MB NV-C S H U Frame NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF00-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV00-SEW/HEW Equipped AC~4/DC~00 ( also 0Hz) V : 0 00V : 0V : 4V : 1 V : 00V : ~ Frame NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW AC ( also 0Hz) DC 00 7~1 Notes: (1) Secure a sufficient input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (% of the lowest rated voltage). () The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open. Table -: Coil Ratings (List of manufacturable special voltages) A C ( V ) D C (V ) MCCB type 4 4~4 4 0 ~ 1 4 4~ ~ ~ AC/DC (V) 4 ~4 NF-C S H U MB (0) A Frame 1A Frame A Frame NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF00-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF0-UEW, NF00-UEW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV00-SEW/HEW NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW. Undervoltage Trip (UVT) Table -11: Coil Rating Series AF and less NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW NF0-SEW NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW Voltage (V) (Note 1) Standard voltage Special voltage (note ) AC-1/- selectable 00-0/0- selectable 0-41/4- selectable (Note4) DC/1 selectable AC (Note4) DC AC (Note4) DC-1 AC4/4 selectable 0-/00 selectable DC4/4 selectable 1/1 selectable AC (Note4) DC4 4 1 AC (Note4) DC4 4-1 Input power (VA) Operating time (ms) (Note ) (Note ) 0 or less ~0 ~ Notes: (1) A desired voltage can be selected by changing the terminal wiring. () The operating time denotes the time from when no voltage is applied to UVT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open. () Time-delayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon request. (4) Compatible to and 0Hz () Rated voltage differs according to make and country of manufacture.please consult your dealer. UVT Voltage Module The UVT voltage module is normally installed on the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). (A separatemount type can be produced upon request.) Circuit breaker D/P D/P J1/UC1 J/UC UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram (Lead-Wire Connection) UVT voltage module D1/P1 J1/UC1 J/UC 49

53 . Test Button Module (TBM) The effect of pressing the test button on the breaker main body is produced while the input control voltage is applied. (Apply the voltage for more than two seconds for the breaker main body of time-delayed NV models.) The model with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) is standard. Table -1 Series NV-C S H U 1 Input rated control voltage (V) Input control power (VA) Compatible to AC-/ DC- (DC4) (Note 1) 1VA or less Note: (1) The specifications of -V AC/-V DC are standard unless otherwise specified. The specifications of 4 V DC are available if requested (.) TBM TBM1 9 (Terminal cover) 7. Lead-wire Specifications Table -1 Type Size Length Marking Ring-mark example Heatresistant wire 0.mm (Note 1) 4mm A ring-mark marked by the terminal symbol is attached to each lead-wire. 9/ALa, 9/ALb, 9/ALc C1/S1, C/S Note: (1) The length is 0 mm for the model of four-pole, right-pole installation. Lead wires are normally extended laterally. Grooves are provided standardly on the side face of the breaker, allowing the extension of the lead wires along them. (Note 1) Note: (1) The models of NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, 0Aframe and more are excluded.. Internal Terminal Type (INT) This unit is an internal accessory that is provided with terminal screws for lead-wire connection. Remark: (1) Available for the models of NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW.

54 . Accessories Internal Accessories 9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT) The circuit beaker can be mounted, being closely fitted to the unit. Terminal screws are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and screws can be tightened further after wiring. A terminal cover is provided standardly. This unit supports the models of front connection, rear connection, and plug-in type (excluding PLT). NFB. B A C Terminal cover (Skeleton) D Table -14: Summary of Dimensions Applicable models A B C D NF0-CS, MB0-CS NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW NF-SWU NF1-CW/SW/HW NF-CWU, NF-SWU NF1-HGW, NF-HGW NF-SFW,NF-SJW, NF-HJW NF-CW/SW/HW, NF-CWU, NF-SW/HW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SKW, NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SLW NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW, NF0-SEW/SDW NF0-UEW(P) NF0-UEW(4P), NF00-UEW Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M. 0.9~1.N m M. terminal screw 14. B Terminal cover (Skeleton).. 1 F G Applicable models A B C D E D NV0-CS NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW NV1-CW/SW/HW NV-CW/SW/HW, NV-SEW/HEW, NV-CWU NV1-RW NV-RW NV0-CW/SW/HW/HEW/REW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW 41 Remarks: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M. 0.9~1.N m () Lead-wire terminal block for TBL is attached to right-side. F G A C M. terminal screw 1. NV Table -1: Summary of Dimensions E 14 Terminals SLT B SLT when three and more than three pieces of internal accessories are mounted on left-side. Terminal cover (Skeleton) Table -1 Applicable models NFB NV NF0-CW/SW/SEW NV0-CW/SW/SEW NF0-HEW/REW, NF-SKW NV0-HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW/SEW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF0-HEW/REW NF0-UEW(P) NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW NF00-HEW/REW, NF-SLW NV00-SEW/HEW NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW NF0-UEW(4P), NF00-UEW Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M. 0.9~1.N m A B M. terminal screw 17 A 7 1

55 . Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) This module functions to give alarm output when load current exceeds a preset current level and serves for securing continuous power supply and also for preventive maintenance. The electronic breakers with mount digital ETR of 1 to 0AF are provided with this module as an option. (Some modules are with this module as standard equipment.) Table -17 NF1-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NV-SEW/HEW Type NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW NF0-UEW NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW NF00-CEW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NF00-REW NF00-UEW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV0-REW NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV00-SEW NV00-HEW NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF0-SEW Pre-alarm LED (Auto reset) Standard equipment Solid state relay (SSR) output- Contacties output (Auto reset) Option Option Pre-alarm module-contact output (1a) S witching capacity ( Self-holding) Switching capacit y 4VDC -00VAC 0mA 4VDC -00VAC 0mA Option VAC or 00VAC A Reset system Press the reset switch or turn off control power. Pre-alarm LED Solid-state relay output Pre-alarm module Pre-alarm characteristics h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s 0. Pre-alarm pickup current Ip In x( ± % ) Pre-alarm operatiing time Tp TL Tp= ± 0% (at 00%) The LED starts blinking on the circuit breaker when load current exceeds the preset current, then changes to continuous glowing when pre-alarm output is given. Open the upper cover of the circuit breaker, connect the connector of the lead wire packed together and use it as the lead wire outlet. In this case, only the lead wire outlet of the internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (For flush plate type, the outlet is manufactured in advanced as a PAL mount.) SLT is attached as standard and is used as the control power source of VAC or 00VAC. In this case, no other internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (Auto resetting is also applicable.) Pre-alarm pick-up current LTD operating time TL 0-0-s ± 0% (at 00%) Current Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating (NF/NV1,AF) h h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s 0. Pre-alarm pickup current Ip In x( ± % ) Pre-alarm operatiing time Tp TL Tp= ± 0% (at 00%) Pre-alarm pick-up current LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) Current Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating NF/NV0,0,00AF NF0,1,0AF PAL OUT LED RISET Reset switch PALa Indicator lamp (Example) P P1 (PALc) (VAC or 00VAC) Control power pre-alarm output In the case of flush plate type. this is mounted on back side of the circuit breaker.

56 . Accessories Internal Accessories 11. Trip Indicator (TI) When the breaker is tripped, this accessory installed on the right side will display the cause of the trip--either long delay (LTD), short or instantaneous (STD/INST), earth-leakage (EAL) (with earth-leakage breakers only)--on its LED and output an alarm signal. In this case, both LTD and STD/INST are treated as overcurrent trips (OAL) and output signals. Pre-alarm is also output. Again, with this module, it is impossible to connect other internal accessories to the breaker s right side.) Table -1 Type NF0-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF00-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW LED contents Long-time delay, Short-time delay, Instantaneous, Pre-alarm 9 control power supply P1 P Control voltage Long-time delay(ltd) alarm LED Pre-alarm(PAL)LED Earth-leakage alarm (EAL)LED Short-time(STD), instantaneous(inst) alarm LED Reset switch PALa Pre-alarm output PALc OALa Overcurrent OALc alarm output EALa Earth -leakage EALc alarm output NV0-SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW Long-time delay, Short-time delay, Instantaneous, Earth-leakage, Pre-alarm Requires -00VAC control voltage. 1. ø4w Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR) In a -phase 4-wire circuits, the voltage rise of the circuit by phase failure of a neutral line is detected, and a contact output is taken out. Table -19 Phase/wire type Rated voltage Usable supply voltage Usable voltage (line voltage) Tripping characteristics Trip indication method eset method Total operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (1% of total phase voltage) Total non-operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (% of total phase voltage) T otal overvoltage operating time ) O vervoltage non-operating time ) ø 4W VAC 41 VAC 04~ VAC VAC VAC 77 0 ( s 1 ( s More than 0. 1 Button Reset button (open-phase display use 1c R ) External output contacts Remark: Using with a shunt-trip device (SHT) equipped breaker will improve tripping and phase protection. AC Voltage cos ø Voltage, V 7A 7A 0V 00, V 7A 7A V 41V A A V DC L/R A A 1 0.A 0.A 0.A 0.A 7. 0 R pole S Pole T Pole Test button Operation display (reset button) Current switch N pole NRaNRbNRc Item output terminal ømm or M4 x 0.7mm screw min M. x 0. screw self-tap terminal x. hole screw M4 x 0.7 mm. 9 9.

57 . Accessories External Accessories OFF TR 1. V-type Operating Handle Appearance (Color N1.) Outside Dimension Diagram A Front base Front plate Center of Hinge and Circuit Handle Front plate I P PED O N B H H This handle in conjunction with the breaker main enables the isolation function effective. The safety standards of EN Standards (EN004-1) are satisfied. Degrees of protection (IEC09) IP is satisfied standardly. OFF-position lock only is available for up to three commercial padlocks (mm, mm). A door-lock mechanism allows the door to be opened at OFF-position only. RESET 1 Plate thickness 1.. Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram Center of the circuit breaker operating handle H C L C L 4 C Minimum E Maximum F Circuit breaker Center of the operating handle Center of the circuit breaker operating handle H C L C L C L D Center of the circuit breaker (Note 1) (Note 1) Left Hinge X Circuit breaker H X 0 or more (H+) or more The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load. Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram Center of the circuit breaker operating handle C L ø9 X Right Hinge G Either M4 0.7 screw or ø G J G Either M4 0.7 screw or ø Circuit breaker C L ø4 4 Table -0: Summary of Dimensions Applicable models Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of both VGSW and VGSWF. Number of poles Dimensions (mm) A B C D E F G H J P 7 V0SW NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW P NV-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW 1 MB-CW/SW P 7 V0SWF (Note ) 1 4P P V1SW 14 1 NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW 4P 1 MB-SW P V1SWF (Note ) 1 4P P, P VSW 14 1 NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW 4P NV-SEW/HEW, MB-SW P, P VSWF (Note ) 1 4P 1 P, P VGSW 17 4P 1 NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW P, P VGSWF (Note ) 14 4P 1 Notes: (1) This hole is not required for two and three poles. () The last letter of F of the type designations of V-type operating handles denotes a fixed type. Remark: (1) You may contact us for details of the V-type operating handle for the U series Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation. Can be locked in OFF position only. The door is locked when ON and can only be opened in OFF position. Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC09): IP. External dimensions A B C Handle Front panel Outview Center of breaker's handle L Center of breaker's handle M screw or 7 N Hinge (left side) X N O or more X Front panel N X P or more Hinge (right side) Table -1 Type Panel thickness 1.~. E G D F Minimum J Maximum K MCCB H (a) B reakers type F ig. Dimensions (mm) EB V4SW NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW N F0-HEW NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW V4SWNV NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW VSW NF00- CEW, NF00-SDW, NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NV00-SEW, NV00-HEW NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW V4SWF N F0-HEW NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW V4SWFNV NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW VSWF NF00-CEW,NF00-SDW, NF00-SEW NF00-HEW Outvie w a (b) M (c) The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load. Drilling A B C D E F G H J K L M P plan b, c NV00-SEW, NV00-HEW N N N N+1 4

58 O F F OFF ON ON REL E. Accessories External Accessories. F-type Operating Handle Appearance (Color N1.) This handle in conjunction with the breaker enables the isolation function effective. The standard model is equipped with a safety device that prevents the circuit breaker from being turned on if the door is open. (If not desired, please specify so.) The handle can be locked at either ON or OFF position. (Three padlocks (mm, mm) can be installed. OFF-position lock only specifications are also acceptable.) Degrees of protection (IEC09) IPX (IPX with dustproof packing) Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected (only in the case of a single padlock ( mm)). Outside Dimension Diagram RESET OPEN Drilling Dimension Diagram Center of the circuit breaker operating handle 4-ø1 Circuit breaker CL TRIPPED 4 CL 7 AS E ø Plate thickness 1.. A± Circuit breaker CL (a) (b) CL B Center of the circuit breaker and the operating handle (b) (a) C D Center of Hinge and Circuit Left hinge Right hinge H X1 H X Left hinge Front plate H X1 Operating handle circuit breaker The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load. Table -: Summary of Dimensions Applicable models Number Dimensions (mm) of poles A *1 B C D * F0SWP * F0SWRP NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW P * F0SW * F0SWR NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW, NV-SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW P, 4P 111 NV-CW/SW P Either * F1SWP * F1SWRP NF1-CW/SW/HW P M * F1SW * F1SWR NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW P, 4P 0 screw or ø * FSW * FSWR NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW, NV-SEW/HEW, MB-SW P, P, 4P 7 1 * FGSW * FGSWR NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW P, 4P 1 1 *1. Dimensions of both front connection and rear connection are shown. The plug-in type has a different reference plane for the circuit breaker. *. The standard type is epuipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out. *. In case of reset opened type use. Remarks: (1) The test button becomes difficult to press when an operating handle is installed on an NV model. Then, use models with either TBM instead. () Dustproof packings are separately available. () You may consult us for details of the F-type operating handle for the U series. Appearance (Color N1.) External dimensions Center of Hinge and Circuit RESTE TPRIEPD Flusf plate 1 Front panel 0 or more Left hinge (H+) or more Less than or more X H 1 or more (H+) or more Right hinge Mounting screws (a) Circuit breaker screws (pcs) (b) Handle screws (pcs) Right hinge H X1 H X 0 or more ( H +1) or more 0 or more (4H + ) or more Includes as standard a safety device which prevents breaker closing as long as the cover is open. (Specify if this safety feature is not required.) Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in ON-lock position--but only in cases when a single padlock (mm, mm) is used. Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC09): IPX (IPX with dustproof packing). Table - F4SW ~ FUW Type * F4SW *7 F4SWR * F4SWNV *7 F4SWRNV * F4UW *7 F4UWR * FSW *7 FSWR * FSWNV *7 FSWRNV * FUW *7 FUWR *7 FSW *7 FSW4P FSW ~ FUR4P *1. Handles with NV in the product name include a test button. *. Dustproof packing is also available as an option. *. Other optional handles can also be mounted. *4. F4SW~FUW are for isolation purposes. (Speify OFF lock only.) type (a) Center of breaker F NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HE W NF0-UEW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV00-SEW/HEW NF0-UEW (4P), NF00-UEW NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW 1 Release screw 11 (b) Plate thickness 1.-. B A ± (X) (Y) C Number of poles P, P, 4P P, 4P P P, P, 4P P, 4P (Y) (X) D E (c) External dimensions Left hinge H X1 F-type operating handle Front panel H Right hinge The figure above shows the relationship between the hinge and breaker viewed from the load side of the breaker. F ig Dimensions (mm) Drilling * p lan A B C D E F M screw 0 or ø7 a b c 1 4 P, 4P P, P 4P *. The figures show the dimensions of the front connection. Some connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for purposes. *. The standard type is equipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out. *7. In case of reset opened type use. X M screw or ø Mounting crews (X), (Y) screws (4 pcs)

59 O F F RESET RESET F F F F RESET F RESET F F F F Specification explanation for F-type operating handles Specification Detailed explanation Kind The position where it can lock ON and OFF-position lock with the padlock. Handle lock position Can not open, when it use padlock. TRIPPED ON OFF-position lock only TRIPPED ON TRIPPED 1 ON When OFF-lock, please turn handle in RESET direction. O F RESET O F RESET The door can be opened with the operating handle RESET-position or OFF-position. When the operating handle was locked, the panel (door) can not be opened. OFF-position TRIPPED ON RESET-position open RESET-position Lock lever TRIPPED ON OFF-position open OFF-position TRIPPED ON Door opening system O F O F O F Lock plate Lock lever locked by lock plate Lock lever unlocked by lock plate Lock lever unlocked by lock plate Mounting direction The top of label is ON side of breaker ON side Reconstruction to vertically from horizontally can not be performed. Vertically type (ON side of breaker is upper) TRIPPED ON Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is left) TRIPPED ON Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is right) TRIPPED ON O F O F O F RESET RESET Label RESET For emergency stop use. For emergency (In accordance with EN004-1) TRIPPED ON Red color You may consult us for details * of emergency O F RESET Yellow color

60 . Accessories External Accessories OFF ON 7. S-type Operating Handle Appearance (Color N1.) The handle can be locked at either ON or OFF position. (Three padlocks (mm, mm) can be installed. Off-position lock only specifications are also acceptable.) Digrees of protection (IEC09) IPX Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected (only in the case of a single padlock ( mm)). Table -4: Summary of Dimensions S0SW Table - max. 1 max. 14 Outside Dimension Diagram Operating plate Max. 9 Max. 11 Operating plate Front plate Face plate Front panel Decorative plate (a) OFF OFF TRIP 4 ON TRIP ON 1 1 Operating plate 114 Operating plate 114 (S4CP S4SP) (S) 0 Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram * ± *1 Retainer Center of breaker's handle *1 Retainer * Retainer (option) ø (Note ) 41.±4 Clasp (Note 1) Center of the circuit breaker operating handle 17 Notes: (1) The clasps are not supplied standardly, and should be prepared by users Details on dimensions and others will be available upon request. () When the optional clasp is used. () The tolerance from the center of ø is shown. (4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference plane for the circuit breaker. () The front plate drilling dimensions for the U series differ from those shown above. Please consult us for their details. Appearance (Color N1.) 4-. External dimensions Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in ON-lock position--but only in cases when a single padlock (mm or mm) is used. Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC09): IPX. Applicable models NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW S1SW NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV1-RW (Note ) Clasp (Note 1) (Note ) Clasp (option) * Deviation: mm or less Front panel Deviation: mm or less 1 or more ( or more if hinge is mounted on the left) * ± Front panel applicable thickness : 1. to. (Note ) 4.±4 A ± B ± 47 Fastening 4 4-ø4. 9 Hinge Center of the circuit breaker Deviation of 4mm or less ø1 Front plate deviation of 4mm or less or more ( or more when the hinge is on the left) Front plate thickness 1.. Fastening A± B± (Note ) C± Hinge Reference plane for the circuit breaker Dimensions (mm) A (Note 4) B (Note 4) C (Note 4) 7 4. SSW NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW NV-SEW/HEW, MB-SW, NV-RW (Note ) SGSW NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW Remark: (1) Reset open-type () These are not suitable for isolation. Centre of breaker D (b) Reference plane for the breaker F ig Dimensions (mm) Type type External dimensions Drilling plan A 4 B 4 C 4 D S * 4CW NF0-CW, NV0-CW a b NF0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW S4SW * NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV00-SEW/HEW a b NF0-UEW (P) NF0-UEW (4P), NF00-UEW 9 7. SSW NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW a b Notes: *1. Retainers are not included. They must be provided by the customer. Remark: (1) Reset open-type *. When using optional retainer. *. Shows the tolerance for the distance from the center of a mm dia. hole. *4. The figures show the front-connection dimensions. Some rear-connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for purposes. *. S4CW and S4SW are for isolation purposes. (Specify OFF lock only.) The tolerance is less than mm. It does not conform to isolation purposes, however, if the deviation is more than mm. Surface plate interlocking fastening (separately available) Operation handle series Type NF-SW NF-CW/SW/HW TG-S0SW MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW NF1-CW/SW/HW MB-SW TG-S1UW NF1-RGW/UGW NF-SW/HW TG-SSW NF-CW/SW/HW NF-SEW/HEW,MB-SW TG-SUW NF-RGW/UGW S-type TG-SGSW NF1-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW TG-S4CW NF0-CW NF0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW TG-S4SW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW TG-S4UW NF0-UEW (P) NF0-UEW (4P), NF00-UEW TG-S NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW Remark: The clamp for surface plate interlock fastener is common to P, P and 4P. type Dimensions (mm) MCCB EB A B NV-SW NV-CW/SW/HW NV1-CW/SW/HW NV1-RW NV-CW/SW/HW NV-SEW/HEW NV-RW NV0-CW NV0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW Drilling diagram and referential diagram Center of the breaker A 1 M screw for attaching the fastening B OFF Center of the handle of breaker ON Drilling diagram

61 4. R-type Operating Handle Appearance (Color N1.) Outside Dimension Diagram A Handle B 1 E D C This handle in conjunction with the breaker main enables the isolation function effective. OFF-position lock only is available for up to three commercial padlocks (ø). Equipped with cylinder key (option) prevent deliberate operation. Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram Center of the circuit breaker operating handle C L Circuit breaker Center of the operating handle Center of the circuit breaker operating handle C L C L Center of the circuit breaker (Note 1) Center of the circuit breaker operating handle Center of the circuit breaker C L G C L G C L G C L C L H (Note 1) Table -: Summary of Dimensions R1SW Applicable models NF1-CW, NF1-SW, NF1-HW NV1-CW, NV1-SW, NV1-HW Number of poles F Either M4 0.7 screw or ø Center of the (a), (b) operating handle (c) F J F Either M4 0.7 screw or ø Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of RGSW. P a 4P Fig Drilling plan b F Either M4 0.7 screw or ø Dimensions (mm) A B C D E F G H J R1UW NV1-RW P c RSW NF-SW, NF-HW, NF-CW, NF-SW, NF-HW NV-CW, NV-SW, NF-HW, NV-SEW NV-HEW P, P 4P a b RUW NV-RW P c RGSW NF1-SGW, NF1-HGW, NF-SGW, NF-HGW, NF-SGW, NF-HGW P, P 4P a b RGUW NF1-RGW, NF1-UGW, NF-RGW, NF-UGW P c Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation. Can be locked in OFF position only. Outview External dimensions A B K M screw or 7 Table -7 Type R4SW R4SWNV RSW (a) type MCCB NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW, D C EB NF0-HEW NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW, NF0-HEW NF00-CEW, NF00-SDW, NF00-SEW, NF00-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW NV00-SEW, NV00-HEW E F H J G F ig Dimensions (mm) Drilling Outview A B C D E F G H J K L plan a b L (b) M

62 . Accessories External Accessories Ordering information V 1) 1 ) SW ) 1) V : Operating handle type ) 1 : Frame size of breaker ) SW : Series name 4) E : For emergency ) F : Adjustment type of depth (For only V-handle) ) NV : Type of breaker S 1) 1 ) SW ) 1) S : Operating handle type ) 1 : Frame size of breaker ) SW : Series name 4) A : Handle lock position S 1) ) SW ) 1) S : Operating handle type ) : Frame size of breaker E 4) A 4) F ) ) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS NV ) V Variable-depth handle R Rotary handle 0 NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW, DSN-SW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW 1 NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, DSN1-CW/SW, NV1-RW NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-RW G NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, DSN1-SGW, DSN-SGW, DSN-SGW, NF1-RGW/UGW, NF-RGW/UGW 4 NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV00-SEW/HEW, DSN00-CW/SW SW indicate WSS C, S and H series UW indicate WSS U series Blank For general E For emergency Blank Variable type F Fix type NV NV type for 0A frame Blank The other 0 NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW, DSN-SW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW 1 NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, DSN1-CW/SW, NV1-RW NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-RW G NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, DSN1-SGW, DSN-SGW, DSN-SGW 4 NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF0-UEW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, DSN00-CW/SW, NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV00-SEW/HEW, NF0-UEW(4P) NF0-UEW, NF00-UEW SW indicate WSS C, S and H series CW indicate WSS 0A frame C series Blank ON/OFF position lock A OFF position lock only NF0-SS/SSD, NF1-SS/SSD, NF0-SS/SSD, NF1-UR F 1) 1 ) SW ) 1) F : Operating handle type ) 1 : Frame size of breaker ) SW : Series name 4) A : Handle lock position ) R : Door open position ) Y : Mounting direction 7) P : Number of poles ) NV : Type of breaker F 1) R 1) ) 1 ) SW ) 1) R : Operating handle type ) 1 : Frame size of breaker ) SW : Series name 4) NV : Type of breaker SW ) 1) F : Operating handle type ) : Frame size of breaker ) SW : Series name 4) 4P : Number of poles A 4) 4P 4) NV 4) R ) Y ) P 7) NV ) 0 NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW, DSN-SW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW 1 NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, DSN1-CW/SW, NV1-RW NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN-CW/SW, NV-RW G NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, DSN1-SGW, DSN-SGW, DSN-SGW, NF1-RGW/UGW, NF-RGW/UGW 4 NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF0-UEW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, DSN0-CW/SW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV00-SEW/HEW, NF0-UEW(4P), NF00-UEW, DSN00-CW/SW SW indicate WSS C, S and H series UW indicate WSS U series Blank ON/OFF position lock A OFF position lock only Blank OFF position open R RESET position open Blank Vertically type (ON side of breaker is upper) Y Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is left) Z Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is right) Blank pole and 4 pole P pole NV NV type for 0 to 00 A frame Blank The other NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW, NF0-SEW/SDW SW indicate WSS Blank pole and pole 4P 4 pole 1 NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW/RW NF-SW/HW,NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/SEW/HW/HEW/RW G NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW NF-SGW/HGW, NF-/SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW 4 NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW, NV00-SEW/HEW SW indicate WSS C, S and H series UW indicate WSS U series NV NV type for 0 to 0 A frame Blank The other 9

63 . Terminal Cover Table - Large terminal cover (TC-L) Small terminal cover (TC-S) Transparent terminal cover (TTC) Rear terminal cover (BTC) Plug-in terminal cover (PTC) type A A A A A B C B C B C B C B C NF0-CS, MB0-CS P TCL-0CSW (4. 0. ) TCS-0CSW (4. 0. ) TTC-0CS (4. 0. ) BTC-0CSW (4. 0..) NF0-CS, NV0-CS, MB0-CS P TCL-0CSW (7 0. ) TCS-0CSW (7 0. ) TTC-0CS (7 0. ) BTC-0CSW (7 0..) NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW P (Note 1) TCL-0SWW (. ) (Note 1) TCS-0SWW (. ) (Note 1) TTC-0SW (. ) BTC-0SWW (. ) PTC-0SWW (..) NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW MB-CW/SW NF1-CW/SW/HW P P IP0 (Note ) TCL-0SWW (7. ) (Note 1) TCL-1SWW (0. ) (Note ) TCS-0SWW (7. ) (Note 1) TCS-1SWW (0..) (Note ) TTC-0SW (7. ) (Note 1) TTC-1SW (0. ) BTC-0SWW (7. ) BTC-1SWW (0..) PTC-0SWW (7..) PTC-1SWW (0..) NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-RW, MB-SW P (Note ) TCL-1SWW (. ) (Note ) TCS-1SWW (..) (Note ) TTC-1SW (. ) BTC-1SWW (..) PTC-1SWW (..) NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW, NV-SEW/HEW, NV-RW MB-SW P P (Note ) TCL-SWW (. ) (Note ) TCS-SWW (..) (Note ) TTC-SW (. ) BTC-SWW (..) PTC-SWW (..) NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW P P IP TCL-GSWW ( 4 ) TCS-GSWW ( 4.) TTC-GSW ( 4 ) BTC-GSWW ( 4.) PTC-GSWW ( 4.) Notes: (1) Attach the letter F to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models, and screws are used for fixing.) () An F-type operating handle can be installed standardly. Remarks: (1) Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (A B C in mm). () The terminal cover for a four-pole model can be produced upon request. Table -9 Large terminal cover (TC-L) Transparent terminal (TTC) cover Rear terminal (BTC) cover Plug-in terminal (PTC) cover type A B C Fig.1 A A A A B C Fig. B C B C B C NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW P, P TCL-4SW ( ) Fig. 1 TTC-4SW ( ) BTC-4SW PTC-4SW ( ) ( ) NF0-UEW P TCL-4SW 1 ( /19. 1) BTC-4SW 1 ( 1 1./19. 4) NF0-SW/SEW/HEW, NV0-SEW/HEW NF0-SW/SEW/HEW, NV0-SEW 4P TCL-4SW4 ( 4. 1) TTC-4SW4 ( 4. 1) BTC-4SW4 ( ) NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV00-SEW/HEW P, P TCL-SW ( 4. 1) TTC-SW ( 4. 1) BTC-SW ( 97. ) NF00-UEW P TCL-UW 1 ( 0 14/194. 1) BTC-SW 1, ( 14/194. ) TCL-SW4 NF00-SEW/HEW 4P Fig. ( 94. 1) TTC-SW4 ( 94. 1) BTC-SW4 ( ) NF0-UEW, NF00-UEW 4P TCL-UW4 1 ( 14/194. 1) BTC-SW4 1, ( 0 14/194. ) NF0-SEW NF1-SEW/SDW P, P TCL-SW ( ) NF0-SEW NF1-SEW/SDW 4P TCL-SW4 ( 19 1) Remarks: 1. ( ) Shows external dimensions in mm. (A B C) 1. Line side/load side. These covers can be mounted on plug-in type.. Except for NF0/0-HEW/REW and NV0/0-HEW/REW. 0

64 . Accessories External Accessories. Electrical Operation Device A Frame and less Table -0: Summary of Model Designations Rated operating voltage Applicable models (Note 1) NF1-CW(P) NF1-SW(P, 4P) NF1-HW NF-SW/HW NF-CW/SW/HW MB-SW NF1-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NF-SGW/HGW NV1-CW/SW/HW NV-CW/SW/HW NV-SEW/HEW 4V DC MDSD04-NF1SWE MDSD04-NFSWE MDSD04-NFGSWE MDSD04-NV1SWE MDSD04-NVSWE MDSD04-NVESWE 4-0V DC MDSD00-NF1SWE MDSD00-NFSWE MDSD00-NFGSWE MDSD00-NV1SWE MDSD00-NVSWE MDSD00-NVESWE Compatible to -V AC/-V DC MDSAD-NF1SWE MDSAD-NFSWE MDSAD-NFGSWE MDSAD-NV1SWE MDSAD-NVSWE MDSAD-NVESWE 0A Frame and more Table -1: Specifications Rated operating voltage (Allowable voltage range ~1%) Control circuit voltage Uc ON P1 P S1 S S4 OFF (RESET) ALa ALc MDS Module alarm switch (AL) (for small current) P.S Power Supply X L MDS Base K1 SW1 K K K1 K M L1 SW This refers to the status in which the circuit breaker and the electrical operation device is OFF. K K K1 K P.S SW1 SW M K1 K K X L1 L Switching power supply (except for 4VDC model) MANUAL/AUTO switch Limit switch (for spring condition detection Charge/Discharge) Motor Relay(for Charge/OFF operation) Relay(for motor) Relay(for motor) Pumping prevention circuit Power LED indicator (red) Trip LED indicator (yellow) 4V DC Control circuit voltage Uc ON P.S SW1 SW M K1 K K X 4-0VDC ON action (s) OFF action 0. or less Charging action 1. or less Power requirement (VA) 1 Note: (1) Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. Remarks: (1) The standard terminal cover can be used. () Please contact us for details of the outside dimensions. MDSD04 -NFSWE MDSD04 -NVSWE/NVESWE MDSD00 -NFSWE MDSD00 -NVSWE/NVESWE MDSAD-NFSWE MDSAD-NVSWE/NVESWE others P1 P S1 S MDS Module P.S Power Supply X Switching power supply (except for 4VDC model) MANUAL/AUTO switch Limit switch (for spring condition detection Charge/Discharge) Motor Relay(for Charge/OFF operation) Relay(for motor) Relay(for motor) Pumping prevention circuit Compatible to -V AC/-V DC MDS Base K M S4 OFF K1 (RESET) is OFF condition and MDS is charge condition K1 SW1 K K K1 SW K K K Motor-drive type () (MD) Spring-charged type (MDS) Table - MCCB type EB type NF-C series NF-S H series NF-U, MB series NV-C series NV-S H series MN series Electrical operation system Rated operating voltage (V) (Allowable voltage range ~1%) 1 NF0-CW NF0-CW NF00-CEW NF0-SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF00-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-UEW NF00-UEW NV0-CW NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW Motor-drive type () NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SEW NF0-SDW Motor-drive type () NF0-CW NF0-CW NF00-CEW NF0-SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-SW NF0-SEW/HEW/REW NF00-SEW/HEW/REW NF0-UEW NF00-UEW NV0-CW NV0-CW NV0-SW NV0-SEW/HEW/REW NV0-SEW/HEW NV00-SEW/HEW Spring-charged type /1VDC, /1VAC, 00/0VAC (1VDC, VAC) OFF ON OFF NF0-SEW NF1-SEW NF1-SDW NF0-SEW NF0-SDW Spring-charged type ON 1 Operating current ( A, rms) DC AC O perating time (s) /1V /1V 00/0V On 0.0 Less than 0. (self-holding) Less than 0. (self-holding) O ff Less than (self-holding) R equired transformer capacity (VA ) Endurance voltage (V).0 (.0) 4.0 (.0).0 (4.) 4.0 (.0).0 (.0). (7.0) 1. ( ) voltages are special options and might require an external resistor. For details, consult your dealer.. ( ) shows starting currents (.0) 1.0 (.0) 0. (1.) 1.0 (.0) 1.0 (.0) 0. (1.) Less than (self-holding)

65 General precautions for motor-operated electrical MCCBs Motor-operated types have intermittent ratings, and therefore they should not be operated more than times consecutively (one on/off counts as an operation). The operating voltage should be between ~1% of the rated control voltage. When the breaker is tripped by trip button or breakdown (i.e., overload or short circuit), the breaker will not show that it has been tripped (except for motor-operated type 1 breakers). The dielectric strength of the electrical operating circuits is 10V. When performing a dielectric strength test simultaneously with another device at a voltage over 10V, the operating circuit terminal should be disconnected. Electrically Operated MCCBs and EBs Motor-operated type () Electrical operation Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw to switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset). Manual operation The manual operation handle can be used to switch the breaker ON and OFF directly. Cautions during electrical operation 1. In case the UVT operates and a circuit breaker trips if the breaker has a UVT, the re-closing procedure may differ according to the state of the breaker before tripping. When the circuit breaker trips while turned ON... Reset (OFF) -> Turn ON When the circuit breaker trips while turned OFF... Turn ON (idle tripping) -> Reset (OFF) -> Turn ON (If it fails to turn ON (idle tripping), please operate Reset (OFF) and turn ON.). Do not send ON and OFF signals consecutively. An interval of at least is required between each ON and OFF.. For models with auto reset capability, resetting after an NFB trip should be performed after an interval of. Automatic Reset If the breaker is an auto reset type, it contains a built-in alarm switch and the off-control circuit closes when the breaker is tripped. Since the breaker automatically resets itself after tripping, the power is easily restored by switching on the breaker again. With a UVT mounted, however, auto reset may not be possible. In this case, please consult your dealer. 4. The electrical operating device is equipped with a pumping prevention circuit. Although it is possible to set the device to OFF while it is set to ON, it is impossible to return it to ON immediately. To return to ON, first shut off the ON switch, then set it back to ON.. Special care is required during electrical operation because the manual operation handle moves at high speed. Also be sure to turn off the circuit power supply when using manual operation.. With manual operation, ensure that the handle is fully extended. Manual operation Internal structure Control circuit The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automaticreset type. (1) Control circuit 1. (0,0 and 00AF) breaker is OFF state () Control circuit. (NF0-SEW to NF 0-SEW) Earth terminal Earth terminal (DC-)P Operational power supply ON P1 S OFF RESET S4 T1 T Y Y X Z Z T1 X Y X T1 Y LS X Y Y X Z M (DC-)P Operational power supply P1 ON S OFF RESET S4 Z T1 T Y T1 X Y X Y X Y Z X Y Y X X Z M LS Z ALa 9 T ALa 9 T M :Motor X :Relay for ON operation Y :Relay for OFF operation Z :Relay for changing Motor polarity T1 :Timer for antipumping T :Timer for automatic reset LS :Limit Switch ALa :Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)

66 . Accessories External Accessories Spring-charged type Electrical operation When the ON switch is closed, the coil is excited to release the latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly. When the OFF switch is closed, a relay starts the motor which turns the breaker OFF and charges the spring simultaneously. Manual operation Pressing the ON button will release the latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly. Pressing the leaf spring, pulling out the manual handle and pumping it back and forth over times will turn the breaker OFF and charge the spring at the same time. Cautions during electrical operation Whenever an electrical operation device is to be installed in or removed from the breaker, the breaker must be tripped and the device discharged. Pushing the TRIP button on an MCCB with an electrical-operation device installed will not trip the breaker in the OFF state. This does not mean the breaker is faulty. Switching OFF a breaker with an electrical-operation device installed will take s. If instant opening is required, install an SHT or UVT to the breaker. The breaker contains a built-in pumping-prevention relay. Internal structure Control circuit The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automaticreset type. (DC-) P Operational power supply Internal connection Earth terminal X M LS CC...Coil for making Y...Relay for pumping prevention X...Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side LS1...Limit switch interlocking with cam LS...Limit switch interlocking with cam LS...Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate M...Motor P1 X X LS ON OFF RESET S S4 Y LS1 Y Y CC Ala Alarm switch for automatic resetting (contact a)

67 Dimensions Front connection NF1-CW, NF1-SW, NF1-HW Insulation barrier (removable) OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated Display hole (ON/OFF/TRIP) Manual handle Operating circuit terminal board (M. screw) Operating circuit terminal cover (standard supply) Power supply module M screw 4 Circuit breaker Center of the electrically operated Automatic/ manual selection switch ON button Trip button P1P S1SS4 P1P S1SS Front plate Display hole (Charge/Discharge) M4x0.7 screw or ø 1111 R1 Font-plate cut out 0 ø. max. 19 (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection Remarks: The -pole models are models with the central pole removed. The three-pole type only is available for the model NF1-CW, and the and types only are available for the model NF1-SW. NF-SW, NF-HW, NF-CW, NF-SW, NF-HW, MB-SW MANUAL/AUTO switch Alarm switch AL (micro loads use) ON button OPEN(TRIP) button NF1-SGW, NF1-HGW, NF-SGW, NF-HGW, NF-SGW, NF-HGW Automatic/ manual selection switch ON button Trip button Insulating barrier (removable) P1 P Insulation barrier (removable) P1 P Electrical operation device Power supply indicator LED(Red) OFFlock plate S1 S S4 OFF lock plate Display hole (ON/OFF/TRIP) S1 S S4 TRIP indicator LED(Yellow) condition's indicator (ON/OFF) Manual handle P1 P Center of the electrically operated P1 P S1 S S4 1 S1 S S4 1 Center of MDS Control circuit terminal Mounting screw (M tapping screw) Manual handle Operating circuit terminal board (M. screw) Front plate Display hole (Charge/Discharge) Control circuit terminal (M. screw) Control circuit terminal cover MDS base Front panel MDS Module Operating circuit terminal cover (standard supply) Power supply M bolt (Hex-soket) module Hex.socket head M bolt 1. Terminal block for alarm switch AL connection (M4 screw) (with terminal cover) Circuit breaker 1 M4X0.7 screw or mm-dia. hole 1 M4x0.7 screw or ø Center of MDS Font-plate cut out Center of the electrically operated R1 R1 Font-plate cut out 0 0 ø. max. 4 (Bus t max=7) Bus drilling for direct connection ø. max. 4 (Conductor thickness t=7 max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used for the LED display for a trip indicator check..-pole breakers are breakers with the central pole removed..nf-cw is available in -and only. MB-SW is available in - pole only. NV1-CW, NV1-SW, NV1-HW Insulation barrier (removable) OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated Display hole (ON/OFF/TRIP) Manual handle Operating circuit terminal board (M. screw) Operating circuit terminal cover (standard supply) Power supply module M screw 4 Circuit breaker Center of the electrically operated Automatic/ manual selection switch ON button Trip button P1 P S1 S S4 0 P1 P S1 S S Display hole Front plate (Charge/Discharge) Test button M4x0.7 screw or ø R1 Font-plate cut out 0 ø. max.19 (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection NV-SEW, NV-HEW Insulating barrier Electrical operation device (removable) Power supply indicator LED(Red) OFFlock TRIP indicator MANUAL/AUTO plate LED(Yellow) switch condition's Alarm switch AL indicator (micro loads use) (ON/OFF) ON button OPEN(TRIP) button P1 P S1 S S4 P1 P S1 S S4 1 Center of MDS Control circuit terminal Mounting screw (M tapping screw) Manual handle 1 1 Test button Control circuit terminal (M. screw) Control circuit terminal cover 4 7 MDS base 1 Front panel MDS Module 1. Terminal block for alarm switch AL connection (M4 screw) (with terminal cover) 1 1 Hex.socket head M bolt M4X0.7 screw or mm-dia. hole Center of MDS R1 Font-plate cut out 0 ø. max. 4 (Bus t max=7) Bus drilling for direct connection Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used for the LED display for a trip indicator check.. breakers are only NV-SEW. 4

68 . Accessories External Accessories Front connection NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW, NF0-HEW, NF0-REW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device 1 Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier device and breaker Center line of breaker 1 Conductor thickness t= max. Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Trip button , Remark: pole models are models with the central pole removed. ø14 M1 bolt NF0-UEW () Motor drive type () M tap or ø7, Center line of electrical operation device and breaker Insulating barrier Conductor thickness t= max. Operating circuit terminal block Center line of breaker M. screw Center line of electrical operation device 77 0 Trip button ø14 M1 bolt NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW, NV0-REW Motor drive type () 7 ø1. ø ø ø M tap or Ø7 Center line of electrical operation device 1 Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier device and breaker Center line of breaker 1 Conductor thickness t= max. Operating circuit terminal block M. screw NF0-CW, NF0-SW, NF0-SEW, NF0-HEW, NF0-REW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device 1 Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier device and breaker Center line of breaker Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Trip button , Remark: pole models are models with the central pole removed. ø14 M1 bolt M tap or ø7, 1 Conductor thickness t= max. Trip button , Remark: pole models are models with the central pole removed. ø14 M1 bolt M tap or ø7,

69 Front connection NF0-UEW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device Insulating barrier Center line of breaker Center line of breaker ø14 M1 bolt Conductor thickness t= max. ø ø7 1. Center line of electrical operation device 4 7 ø14 11 ø7 1 Trip button 0 1 Neutral pole Operating circuit terminal block M. screw NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-SEW, NV0-HEW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device and breaker Trip button NF00-CEW, NF00-SDW, NF00-SEW, NF00-HEW, NF00-REW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier device and breaker Center line of electrical operation device Insulating barrier Test button ø14 M1 bolt Center line of breaker Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Conductor thickness t=1 max. 1 Center line of breaker Conductor thickness t= max. Operating circuit terminal block M. screw M tap or ø Trip button, Remark: pole models are models with the central pole removed NF00-UEW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device and breaker Center line of breaker Center line of electrical operation device 1 7 ø14 M1 bolt Center line of electrica Center line of breaker operation device Insulating barrier Neutral pole Conductor thickness t= max. ø ø7 1 M tap or ø7, ø14 11 ø7 Trip button 1 1 ø14 M1 bolt Neutral pole Operating circuit terminal block M. screw M tap 1 or ø7

70 . Accessories External Accessories Front connection NV00-SEW, NV00-HEW Motor drive type () Center line of electrical operation device and breaker 1 Trip button Insulating barrier ø14 M1 bolt Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Test button Conductor thickness t=1 max. NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW, NF1-SDW Motor drive type () 1 1 0() () 77 Center line of model Conductor thickness t= max. Insulating barrier 1 Bolt max. Operating circuit M1 terminal block M. screw M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt () Neutral pole Center line of electrical operation device and model NF0-SEW, NF0-SDW Motor drive type () M screw or ø (1.) 0 ø11 1 (1.) Conductor thickness t= width 7 max. Bolt max. M Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Center line of electrical operation device Neutral pole M screw or ø 7 7

71 Rear connection NF0-SEW () Motor drive type () Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated M. screw Connection Conductor thickness allowance t= width 7 max Mounting angle over 9 1 ø17. ø under NF0-SEW () Motor drive type () 0 1 ø11 M bolt 1 M tap or ø Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Mounting angle Stud can be rotated Connection allowance Conductor thickness 1 t= width 7 max. 1. Mounting angle 1 ø17. ø under 1. over 9 Center line of electrical operation device ø11 M bolt M tap or ø NF0-SDW Motor drive type () Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated M. screw Connection allowance Conductor thickness t= width 7 max Mounting angle over 1 ø over ø9. 1 ø11 1 M bolt 1 M tap or ø NF0-SDW () Motor drive type () Operating circuit terminal block M. screw Mounting angle Stud is in horizontal direction. Stud can not be rotated. Connection allowance Conductor thickness 1 t= width 7 max. 1. Mounting angle over 7 ø17. ø9. over 17 Center line of electrical operation device ø11 M bolt 1 1 M tap or ø

72 . Accessories External Accessories 7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI) Table - Outside Dimension Diagram (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in) Number Panel mouting Direct mount on Applicable models of poles Front connection, Rear connection, Plug-in Dimension A mm circuit breaker NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW P 47. MI-0SW NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW P MI-0SWFB NF-SW/HW 4P MI-0SW4 NF1-CW/SW/HW P 4 MI-0SW P MI-1SWFB NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW, NV1-RW 4P MI-1SW4 NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW, NV-SEW/HEW, MB-SW, NV-RW NF-SW/HW, NF-SW/HW, NV-SW/HW/SEW/HEW NF1-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW NF1-SGW/HGW/UGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW/UGW 1 1 Front, Rear, Plug-in Stroke 1. Center of mechanical interlock Center of circuit breaker Panel plate thickness (t1~.) (Gap between the circuit breaker and the panel) Front, Rear, Plug-in (panel ) Drilling Dimension Diagram (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in) 4ø (ø. and ø7. countersunk (rear) (Note 1) ); use M 0. flat countersunk head screws to fix P P 4P P 4P A (Note ) (Note ) MI-0SW MI-SW4 MI-0SW MI-SW4 Machine this part according to the front plate drilling dimensions of the main breaker. Center of mechanical interlock Center of circuit breaker With two breakers, use a panel-mounted mechanical interlock for one-way only input. A breaker- mechanical to mount on the breaker main unit can be made to order. Consult your dealer for more details. Notes: (1) When the panel plate thickness is. or more, prepare four holes (ø. and ø9. countersunk (rear)). () These are standard dimensions for - and models, but can be altered upon request. () The U series have different dimensions. Please contact us for details. Remarks: (1) Please contact us for outside dimensions of other models of different specifications. () These are not isolation-compatible. Mechanical interlock MI-SWFB MI-GSWFB (front) Type F G P MI-4SWFB MI-SWFB 4 0 E Mechanical interlock (0) () () Mechanical interlock B Mounts to 4-.mm-dia hole, 7.mm-dia countersunk (rear)* 1 1. A Stroke External dimensions C Panel thickness (t1~.mm) Gap between panel and breaker Differs with main breaker unit drilling plan. Mechanical interlock B 1() 1.(0) A Stroke C Panel thickness (t1.~.mm) 1. Gap between panel and breaker External dimensions Mounts to 4-.mm-dia hole, 7.mm-dia countersunk (rear)* Differs with main breaker unit drilling plan. Mechanical interlock Mechanical terminal mount P 47. Stroke External dimensions G D P Mechanical interlock (0) P ( ) dimension are shown for NF0-SS NF0-SSD (breaker mount) Fig.1 Fig. Fig. S1. Above 0AF, use panel thickness t=1.~.mm. S. When the panel thickness is greater than t=.mm, use 4-.mm-dia 9.mm dia countersunk (rear). 1. Specify the breaker pitch (P). No need to specify the panel thickness (t). (Usable panel thickness range: t=1~.mm. Above 0AF, use panel thickness t=1.~.mm.). For isolation purposes with 0/0/00AF models, keep the C dimension deviation within ± 1mm. 4. Enquire for more details. F P F M screws or 7mm-dia Table of Altered Dimensions Table -4 B reaker type Pitch (P) 1 Dimensions (mm) mount ( 4) MCCB EB Special Standard Standard Type Standard C t A B D E Fig. Type P P P Type 4P ( ) P NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 1. MI-4SWFB NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW MI-4SW MI-4SW NF0-UEW(P) 1 ( ). Fig.1 NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV00-SEW/HEW 0. MI-SWFB MI-SW MI-SW NF0-UEW(4P), NF00-UEW 0 0 NF0-SEW, NF1-SEW/SDW M-SW 0 MI-SW Fig. NF0-SEW/SDW M-1SW 1 MI-1SW Fig. Fig. 9

73 . Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder Table - Description Lock cover () Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S) (Note ) OFF Lock with Padlock Card holder Appearance NF0-CS, MB0-CS NF0-CS, NV0-CS, MB0-CS NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW P P P -0CS HL-0FH (Note 1) HLS-0SWP NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW MB0-SW, MB-CW/SW P -0SW HLF-0SW HLN-0SW HLS-0SW NF-SW/HW NF1-CW/SW NF1-HW NF1-CW/SW/HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW MB-SW, NV1-RW 4P P P P -1SW HLF-1SW HLN-1SW (Note 1) HLS-1SWP HLS-1SW CH-P No. NF1-SW/HW, NV1-SW/HW 4P NF-SW/HW, NF-CW/SW/HW, NV-CW/SW/HW NV-SEW/HEW, MB-SW NV-RW P P 4P -SW HLF-SW HLN-SW (Note 1) HLS-SW NF1-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW, NF-SGW/HGW NF1-RGW/UGW, NF-RGW/UGW P, 4P -GSW HLF-GSW (Note 1) HLN-GSW HLS-GSW HLF-GSW Notes: (1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. () HL-S types are used for OFF-lock. Remark: (1) Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (mm padlock for HL, and mm padlock for HL-S.) Table - P roduct H andle (HT) H andle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S ) Card holder type NF0-CW, NV0-CW NF0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV0-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV0-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF0-UEW (P) NF0-UEW (4P) NF00-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV00-SEW/HEW NF0-SEW NF1-SEW/SDW NF0-SEW/SDW HT-4CW HL-4CW ( 1 ) HT-4SW HL-4SW ( 1 ) HT-SW HL ( 1) HLS-4SW ( 1) HLS-4UW ( 1) HLS-SW ( 1) HLS-UW ( ) Remarks: 1. Padlocks for HL and HL-S must be provided by the customer. 1. Must be ordered with breaker.. The HL without padlock can be used as a lock cover ().. Applicable types are NF0-UEW (4P) and NF00-UEW (P, 4P). CH-P No. 9. IEC mm Rail Mounting Adapters Table -7 Adapter for IEC mm rail M4 0.7 screw Adapter for IEC mm rail Applicable models Number of poles Parts number Outline NF0-CS, NV0-CS, MB0-CS P, P DIN-0CS Fig.1 NF-SW, NF-CW/SW/HW NV-SW, NV-CW/SW/HW, MB0-SW MB-CW/SW P P DIN-0SW Fig. CL CL CL Fig.1 Mounting hook for IEC mm rail Fig. 4 NF1-CW/SW NF1-HW, NV1-CW/SW/HW, MB-SW P P P P DIN-1SW DIN-1SW Fig Fig.

74 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s and Motor s NF0-CS MB0-CS Series Frame size 0 Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 0 IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V 0V 41V 0V V 1./1. 1./1../ Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) NF0-CS,,, 1, 0, 0 C series (), (.), 4, (),., (),, 1 (for single phase) MB0-CS Mounting screw: M (pcs) Small terminal cover pcs Only MB0-CS 1.4,., 4, 7.1,, 1,, Type NF0-CS Operating Characteristics h h min Types NF0-CS MB0-CS 0min min min min s 0s 0s s s 4s s Max. 0.s 0.4s Min. 0.s s 0.04s 0.0s % of rated current Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Left-side -pole Operating handle Right-side AL AX Lead wire direction change rate (%) Rated ambient 0 Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced upon request. () refer to page. Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories Accessories Reference page Small Large Rear Skeleton Handle lock Lock cover Rail adapters Terminal cover (TC-S) TCS-0CSW (*1) (TC-L) TCL-0CSW (*1) (BTC) BTC-0CSW (*1) (TTC) TTC-0CS (*1) (HL) HL-0FH () 0CS (DIN) DIN-0CS 0 Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 71

75 Front connection Mtg. hole M screw 14. Applicable wire size:1.mm-dia. to 14mm M4 0.7 taps or ø 7. ø. 9 ø ø.. 4 -pole (max.) Bus t max. = Bus drilling for direct connection. -pole Rear connection Mtg plate t max. =. M4 0.7 taps or ø -pole R (min).. (min) ø14 0 Insulating tube mtg M screw M4 0.7 screw -pole -pole 47 Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle IEC Rail Mounting Adapter mm IEC-rail adapter for installation 1 4 -pole Installation utensil for mm IEC-rail 7

76 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s and Motor s NF-SW NF-SW MB0-SW MB-SW NF-CW NF-HW MB-CW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles 1 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 00 IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V./1./1 / 7./4 DC V./1 Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) NF-SW 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) NF-CW 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 1./1 00./1./1 / 7./4 1: Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request. NF-SW 4 () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) /4 7./4 7./4 1/ 7./4 NF-HW (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 1 4./1 7./4 / / /1 7./4 MB0-SW /1 / 7./4 MB-CW /1 / 7./4 Mounting screw: M4 0.7 ( and P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) (Note) Insulation barrier: (P: 1pc, P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Note: These are supplied with NF-SW, NF-HW, and MB-SW models. MB-SW /4 7./4 1/ Type NF-SW Operating Characteristics 4h 4h 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min AC use Types NF-SW NF-CW NF-SW NF-HW h 0min 0min 1 min min DC use Types NF-SW NF-CW NF-SW NF-HW h 0min 0min 1 min min AC use Types MB0-SW MB-CW MB-SW min 0s 0s s Max. min 0s 0s s Max. min 0s 0s s Max. s Min. s Min. s Min. 0.s 0.s 0.s s Internal Accessories -pole Remark: (1) refer to page. % of Rated current 0.0s Left-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction % of Rated current handle Right-side 0.0s % of Rated current Temperature Characteristics change rate (%) Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) 0 External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V F0SW (*1) S0SW V0SWF Reference page 7 4 R (*) HL -0SW HLF-0SW HLN-0SW HL-S HLS-0SW (*1) Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*1) 9 Small TC-S TCS-0SWW (*1) Large TC-L TCL-0SWW (*1) Skeleton TTC TTC-0SW (*1) Rear BTC BTC-0SWW (*1) Plug-in PTC PTC-0SWW (*1) IEC mm rail adapters (option) Reference page 0 DIN-0SW Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. 7

77 Front connection Mounting hole Insulation barrier (removable) M 0. screw (M for 0A and A) 4 Applicable wire size:1.mm-dia.to mm M4 0.7 taps or mm dia.hole φ. φ Trip button 7 Neutral pole 1 4 φ. (.mm-diameter for 0A and A) 7 1. max. -pole -pole 4 7 (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection Rear connection -pole Mounting panel t=.max Insulation tube M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia.hole R min. M screw M4 0.7 screw for breaker φ pole 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Plug-in Mounting panel Plug-in terminal block M 0. terminal block screw 0 7 (plug-in terminal block) max. 7 Center line of breaker body Details of terminal M screw -pole φ. Conductor drilling for direct connection 7 -pole Cutout and drilling plan 7 mm-dia.hole or or M 0. taps 74

78 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s and Motor s NF1-CW NF1-HW NF1-SW MB-SW NF1-CW NF1-SW NF1-HW MB-SW Rated current In (Amp.) (0) (7) 0 1 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 1 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 (1.) (1) () () 4 71 Type NF1-SW Number of poles 4 4 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 00 0 AC V 0V 4V 7./4 / /4 1/9 /1 / 0/1 / /1 IEC (Icu/Ics) 0V 0V / 0/1 0/1 / / / 0/1 / V 7./4 1/ /0 DC 1 0V 7./4 1/ /0 0V 1/ /0 Mounting screw: M4 0.7 ( and P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) (Note) Insulation barrier: (P: 1pc, P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Note: These are supplied with NF1-SW, NF1-HW, and MB-SW models. 1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 1, models can be used for up to 0 V DC, and models for up to 0 V DC. Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Min. Time-delay trip Tyeps NF1-CW A~A NF1-SW A~A NF1-HW A~A MB-SW A~A Max. (0A~A) Max. (A~A) AC DC Max. total breaking time Instantaneous trip h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Min. Time-delay trip Max. Tyeps NF1-SW 1A~0A NF1-HW 1A~0A MB-SW 1.A~A AC DC Instantaneous trip 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Min. Tyeps NF1-CW 1A NF1-SW 1A AC Max. DC Max. total breaking time 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Min. Tyeps MB-SW A NF1-SW A NF1-HW A Max. AC DC Max. total breaking time % of Rated current % of Rated current Max. total breaking time % of Rated current % of Rated current Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB-SW. Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve -pole, Remark: (1) refer to page. External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V F1SW (*1) S1SW V1SW (*) 7 4 R R1SW -1SW (*4) HLF-1SW HL HLN-1SW HL-S HLS-1SW (*1)(*4) Reference page Ml Ml-0SW (*1) 9 Small TC-S TCS-1SWW (*1) Large TC-L TCL-1SWW (*1) Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW (*1) Terminal cover Left-side AL Accessories Mechanical interlock AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Operating handle Right-side Rear BTC BTC-1SWW (*1) Pulg-in PTC PTC-1SWW (*1) IEC mm rail adapters Electrical operation device 0 DIN-1SW (*1) MDS-NF1SWE (*) Current rating (%) Reference page Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*) Specify the working voltage. An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body. (*4) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. 7

79 Front connection CL Mounting hole Insulation barrier (removable) M screw 4 Solderless terminal for wire size 14~/0AWG CU/AL 11 4 Wire connection (*1) Trip button 0 4 φ Neutral pole max. -pole M4X0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole -pole (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t=. max. Mounting base Stud rotatable by -pole CL CL -pole CL CL CL 1 Connection allowance 11 CL (*1) R1 R M bolt. 1 0 Insulation tube 0 M4 0.7 breaker screw -pole 0 0 φ1 0 0 M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole 7 Front-panel cutout 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block M 0. Terminal block screw CL (plug-in terminal block) max M screw 0 φ Details of terminal -pole Conductor drilling for direct connection -pole mm-dia. hole or M 0. taps Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 1 and 111 both sides. Remark: -pole model of NF1-HW are model with the central pole removed. 7

80 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s and Motor s NF-CW NF-HW NF-HW NF-SW NF-SW MB-SW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 00 AC V 0V 4V 1/ /1 / 0/ /1 / 1/ 1/ /1 / 0/ /1 IEC (Icu/Ics) 0V 0V 0/1 / /1 / 1/9 /1 0/1 / /1 / V 1/ /0 / 1/ /0 DC 0V 1/ /0 / 1/ /0 0V 1/ /0 1/ /0 Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) NF-SW NF-HW NF-CW () NF-SW () NF-HW Mounting screw: M4 0.7 ( and P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) *1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 1, models can be used for up to 0 V DC, and models for up to 0 V DC. MB-SW /1 0/1 / Type NF-SW Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Types NF-CW NF-SW NF-HW Max. MB-SW NF-SW NF-HW Ambient Compensating Curve Curreny rating (%) Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) Rated ambient Min. s A AC Max. total 0.s 1~A AC breaking A DC time 0. 1~A DC s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB-SW. () refer to page. Internal Accessories Left-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Operating handle Right-side External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V R FSW SSW VSW (*) RSW 7 4 (*4) HL HL-S -SW HLF-SW HLN-SW HLS-SW Reference page Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*1) 9 Small TC-S TCS-SWW (*1) Large TC-L TCL-SWW (*1) Skeleton TTC TTC-SW (*1) Rear BTC BTC-SWW (*1) Plug-in PTC PTC-SWW (*1) Electrical operation device MDS-NFSWE (*) Reference page 0 1 Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body. (*) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*4) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. 77

81 Front connection Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) 1 1 M bolt (Hex-soket) 4 0 Solderless terminal for wire size 1 17A 14 9mm 00 A 1mm Wire connection 1 ø4. φ. Trip button 1 Neutral pole φ max. (Bus t max.=7) Bus drilling for direct connection M4 0.7 taps or φ Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated Connection allowance R φ9 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube ø4 M4 0.7 taps or φ 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout. Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block (Terminal block) Connection allowance M Terminal block screw Stud attachable in this derection only 0 φ9 M bolt Insulating barrier φ Remarks: 1. -pole models are models with the central pole removed.. Only - and models are available for the model of NF-CW, and only models are available for the model of MB-SW. 7

82 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF-SGW NF-SGW NF1-SGW NF-HGW NF-HGW NF1-HGW Rated current In (Amp.) Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) NF1-SGW RT 1,,,, 01 NF1-SGW RE 1,,, 71 NF1-HGW RT 1,,,, 01 NF1-HGW RE 1,,, 71 NF-SGW RT 1 NF-SGW RE 0 Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) V / / 0/0 0/0 / / 0V 0/0 0/0 / / 0/0 0/0 AC 4V / / / / / / IEC (Icu/Ics) 0V 0V / / / / 7/7 / 7/7 / / / / / 00V 0/0 / 0/0 DC 1 0V 0/0 / 0/0 00V 0/0 / 0/0 Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) NF-HGW RT NF-HGW RE NF-SGW RT NF-SGW RE NF-HGW RT NF-HGW RE Rated current In (Amp.) 1 0 1, Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 4h h 0min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Min. Type NF-SGW Time-delay trip Pre-alarm pickup current IP Ir ( ) ±% Pre-alarm operating time TP TL TP= ± 0% (at 00%) INST pickup current Il In (4~14) ±1% AC DC % of Rated current Thermal-Adjustable types NF1-SGW/HGW -A (Rated current In=A) 1-A (Rated current In=A) Max. Instantaneous trip current ratio AC DC x In (%) x In (%) 0±00 ±0 Max. total breaking time Instantaneous trip Electric types LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) NF-SGW NF-HGW Note) Current setting Ir Rated current In 0~A A (Adjustable) STD pickup current IS Ir ( )±1% Max.total breaking time STD operating time TS 0.±0.0s 0.±0.04s 0.1±0.0s 0.0±0.0s % of Current setting Note) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) V 0V 0/0 / AC 4V / IEC (Icu/Ics) 0V 0V 7/7 / 00V / DC 1 0V / 00V / Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) h h 0min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 % of Rated current 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s /0 / / 7/7 / % of Rated current 4 / 0/0 / / / 0/0 0/0 0/ Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) 4 / 0/0 / / / 4 0/0 / / 7/7 / / / / 4 0/0 / / 7/7 / Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) 1: Use either -pole. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 1, models can be used for up to 0 V DC, and models for up to 00V DC. Min. Time-delay trip Pre-alarm pickup current IP Ir ( ) ± % Pre-alarm operating time TP TP = TL ± 0% (at 00%) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) INST pickup current Il In (4~14) ± 1% Thermal-Adjustable types NF1-SGW/HGW -A (Rated current In=A) -A (Rated current In=A) AC Max DC Instantaneous trip current ratio AC DC x In (%) x In (%) 0±00 ±0 Max. total breaking time Instantaneous trip Electric types LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) NF-SGW NF-HGW Note) Current setting Ir Rated current In 1~A A (Adjustable) STD pickup current IS Ir ( ) ± 1% Max.total breaking time STD operating time TS 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s % of Current setting Note) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Min. Time-delay trip Ambient Compensating Curve Current rating (%) Max. AC (Adjustable range) DC (Adjustable range) RT type Thermal-Adjustable types NF-SGW/HGW -A (Rated current In=A) NF-SGW/HGW 1-A (Rated current In=A) NF1-SGW/HGW 0-1A (Rated current In=1A) Instantaneous trip adjustment range Position AC DC of notch x In (%) x In (%) 4 0±0 ± ±00 ±0 Instantaneous trip Max. total breaking time Rated ambient 4h h 0min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Pre-alarm pickup current IP Ir ( ) ± % Pre-alarm operating time TP TL TP= ± 0% (at 00%) Derating of Load current (%) INST pickup current Il In (4~14) ±1% 1 0 RE type 0 LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) Electric types NF1-SGW NF1-HGW Note) Current setting Ir 1~ A ~ A ~ A 7~ 1A (Adjustable) STD pickup current IS Ir ( ) ±1% Max.total breaking time Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) STD operating time TS 0.±0.0s 0.±0.04s 0.1±0.0s 0.0±0.0s % of Current setting Note) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Rated current In A A A 1A 79 Internal Accessories Right-side SHT or UVT Operating handle Left-side Remark: (1) refer to page. AL AX Lead wire direction External Accessories Accessories Reference page F FGSW Mechanical S SGSW 7 interlock Operating handle Ml Ml-0SW (*1) 9 V VGSW (*) 4 Small TC-S TCS-GSWW (*1) R RGSW Large TC-L TCL-GSWW (*1) -GSW Skeleton TTC TTC-GSW (*1) 0 Handle lock device (*) HLF-GSW Rear BTC BTC-GSWW (*1) HL HLN-GSW Plug-in PTC PTC-GSWW (*1) HL-S HLS-GSW OFF Lock with Padlock HLF-GSW Electrical MDS-NFGSWE operation device (*4) 1 Terminal cover Accessories Reference page Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. (*) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*4) Specify the working voltage.

83 Front connection Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) M bolt (Hex-soket) 4 Solderless terminal for wire size. 1mm Trip button 1 1 Neutral pole 11 φ. 79 φ4. Hex-socket set screw Wire connection φ..1 M4 0.7 taps or φ max. (Bus t max.=7) 1 Bus drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated Connection allowance R φ9 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube φ4 M4 0.7 taps or φ 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-panel cutout. Plug-in Plug-in terminal block (Terminal block) Mounting plate M bolt (Hex-soket) 9 M Terminal block screw Stud can be rotated Connection allowance ø9 Mbolt Insulating barrier (removable) φ Remark: -pole models are models with the central pole removed. 0

84 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF-RGW NF1-RGW NF-UGW NF1-UGW Rated current In (Amp.) NF1-RGW RT 1 NF1-UGW RT 1 NF-RGW RT 1 NF-UGW RT 1 Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC DC V 0V 4V 0V 0V 00V 0V 00V 4 4 / 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 0/0 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 / 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 0/0 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Type NF-RGW Operating Characteristics 4h 4h 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Max. Thermal-Adjustable types NF-RGW/UGW -A (Rated current In=A) 1-A (Rated current In=A) Instantaneous trip adjustment range Position of notch 4 AC x In (%) 0± ±00 h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Thermal-Adjustable types NF1-RGW/UGW -A (Rated current In=A) -A (Rated current In=A) Instantaneous trip current ratio AC x In (%) Max. 0±00 h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Thermal-Adjustable types NF1-RGW/UGW -A (Rated current In=A) 1-A (Rated current In=A) Instantaneous trip current ratio AC x In (%) 0±00 Max. s s s AC (Adjustable range) 0.s 0. Max. total breaking time 0.s 0. AC Max. total breaking time 0.s 0. AC Max. total breaking time s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current % of Rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Remark: (1) refer to page Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Mechanical interlock Electrical operation device F S V R MI VGUW RGUW MI-0SW (*1) 4 9 Reference page Terminal cover Accessories Small Large Skeleton Rear Plug-in Handle lock device TC-S TC-L TTC BTC TCS-GSWW (*1) TCL-GSWW (*1) TTC-GSW (*1) BTC-GSWW (*1) PTC PTC-GSWW (*1) -GSW (*) HLF-GSW HL HLN-GSW HL-S HLS-GSW Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. Reference page 0 1

85 Front connection Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable). M bolt (Hex-soket) 4 Solderless terminal for wire size. 1mm Trip button 1 19 Neutral pole φ φ4. 4 max. φ..1 Hex-socket set screw Wire connection (Bus t max.=7) Bus drilling for direct connection M4 0.7 taps or φ 01 Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated Connection allowance R φ9 1 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube ø4 M4 0.7 taps or φ. 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-panel cutout Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block (Terminal block) Connection allowance M Terminal block screw Stud attachable in this derection only 0 φ9 Mbolt Insulating barrier 7 φ7 Remark: -pole models are models with the central pole removed.

86 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-CW NF0-SW Type NF0-SW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC AC (Icu/Ics) DC(*1) Standard Attached Parts V 0V 4V 0V 0V V Front connection Rear connection NF0-CW NF0-SW / /1 /1 / 0/ / 0/0 4/4 4/4 / / Mounting screw: M 0 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, models can be used for up to 0VDC, and models for up to 0VDC. Operating Characteristics 4h 4h h h 0min 0min 1 min min Type NF0-CW 0min 0min 1 min min Type NF0-SW min min 0s 0s s Min. Max. 0s 0s s Min. Max. s s AC DC 0.s DC Max. total interrupting time 0.s AC Max.total interrupting time 0.0s Time delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT (*1) Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Reference ambient temperature (*1) (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. External Accessories (An order for Accessories Operating handle F S V F4SW S4CW, S4SW V4SWF, V4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) Auxiliary handle should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (HT) HT-4CW, HT4SW Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page Large Skeleton Rear (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) (TTC) TTC-4SW (*1) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) Handle lock device HL HL-S HL-4CW, HL-4SW HLS-4SW Electrical operation device Terminal cover Accessories (Reference ambient temperature C) Reference page Ambient temperature ( C)

87 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) 1 4 Conductor thickness t= max. 94. Mounting hole Trip button ø14 M1 bolt Neutral pole 9 9 ø1. ø (NF0-SW) 14 (NF0-CW) 1 ø. Conductor thickness t= max. Conductor drilling for direct connection M tap or ø7 194 R mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent Plug-in Line side -ø 4 Connection allowance M tap or ø7 4 4-M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 7. M screw for breaker Insulation tube 7 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate M terminal block screw Connection allowance ø1 M1 bolt 7. Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier ø Remark: (1) -pole models are models with the central pole removed. 4

88 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW 00-0 adjustable 4 4 / 0/0 4/4 / / /1 / / / / / 1/ 1/ 1/7 Type NF0-SEW Standard Attached Parts Front connection Rear connection Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Operating Characteristics h h h Types NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW 0min 0min 1 min min LTD operating time at 1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Rated Current Ir: 00~0A In: 0A (Adjustable) LTD operating time TL min 0s 0s s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( ±% ) s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x( ) ±1% 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x4~x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time Current setting ( % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Internal Accessories Left-side External Accessories (An order for Accessories Operating handle Right-side Lead wire AL AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Operating handle F S V F4SW S4SW V4SWF, V4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW (*1) (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. Reference page Notes: (*1) This is for NF0-SEW. (*) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page (*1) Terminal cover Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1)(*) (TTC) TTC-4SW (*) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1)(*) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-4SW Temperature Characteristics Reference page 0 1 Continuous load current (%) 1 0 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C)

89 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) 1 4 Conductor thickness t= max. 94. Mounting hole Trip button ø14 M1 bolt Neutral pole ø1. ø ø. Conductor thickness t= max. Conductor drilling for direct connection M tap or ø7 194 R mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent Plug-in Line side -ø 4 Connection allowance M tap or ø7 4 4-M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 7. M screw for breaker Insulation tube 7 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate M terminal block screw Connection allowance ø1 M1 bolt 7. Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier ø

90 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-UEW Type NF0-UEW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) V 0V 4V 0V 0V Front connection Rear connection NF0-UEW 00-0 adjustable 4 1/1 00/00 00/00 00/00 Mounting screw: M (pcs), M 174 (pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 4pcs) Mounting screw: M 7 (pcs), M 11 (pcs) Operating Characteristics h h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( ±% ) Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) LTD operating time at 1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Type NF0-UEW Current setting Rated Current Ir: 00~0A In: 0A (Adjustable) LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x4~x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time Current setting ( % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Internal Accessories Left-side External Accessories (An order for Accessories Operating handle Right-side Lead wire AL AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI F F4UW (*1) Operating handle S S4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW (*1) (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) Specification of model is same as that of NF00-UEW. () refer to page 97. should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Reference page Note: (*1)The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 7 9 (*1) Terminal cover Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) (TTC) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-4UW Current reducing curve Reference page Continuous load current (%) 1 0 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) 7

91 Front connection Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness t= max. 7 Mounting hole Trip button ø14 1 M1 bolt ø1. ø1. ø7 ø ø. Conductor thickness t= max. Conductor drilling for direct connection 4 M tap or ø7 R mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout 9 Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent Line side -ø Connection allowance M screw or ø M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 7 M screw for breaker Insulation tube 7 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in Plug-in terminal block Mounting angle Mounting angle M terminal block screw Connection allowance Stud attachable in this direction only ø 17 max. 0 1 ø1 M1 bolt 7 Insulating barrier Note (1): Overall dimension of model is same as that of model of NF00-UEW. Refer to page 9.

92 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-CW NF0-SW Type NF0-SW Operating Characteristics 4h h Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC DC(*1) Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) V 0V 4V 0V 0V V Front connection Rear connection NF0-CW NF0-SW /9 /1 /1 / 0/ / 0/0 4/4 / / / Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, models can be used for up to 0VDC, and models for up to 0VDC. 4h h Type Type 0min NF0-CW 0min NF0-SW 0min 1 min 0min 1 min min min min min 0s 0s s Min. Max. 0s 0s s Min. Max. s s AC DC 0.s DC Max.total interrupting time 0.s AC Max.total interrupting time 0.0s Time delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT (*1) Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Reference ambient temperature External Accessories (*1) (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Reference page Accessories F F4SW Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) Operating handle S S4SW 7 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW (*1) V V4SWF, V4SW 4 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) 9 Handle HL HL-4SW Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW lock device HL-S HLS-4SW Electrical operation device Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. Terminal cover (Reference ambient temperature C) Ambient temperature ( C) Reference page 0 1 9

93 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) 1 4 Bus t max.= ø. Bus t max.= Bus drilling for direct connection Mounting hole 9 Trip button ø1. ø7 Neutral pole ø14 M1 bolt M screw or ø7 1.0mm clearance on each side of handle. Front-plate cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Eddy-current heat-reducing slit Line side -ø L C R Connection allowance M screw or ø M tap or ø Plug-in Plug-in terminal block ø1 M1 bolt Mounting plate 1 M terminal block screw 7. Connection allowance 9 M breaker screw Insulating tube attached to P:Center pole 4P:Center & neutral poles 7 ø 4.. ø Load side M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear Stud attachable in this direction only 7 11 ø1 M1 bolt 1 1. Insulating barrier 1 11 Remark: (1) -pole models are models with the central pole removed.

94 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V NF0-SEW NF0-HEW NF0-REW 00-0 adjustable 4 4 / 0/0 4/4 / / /1 / / / / / 1/ 1/ 1/7 Type NF0-SEW Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) Front connection Rear connection Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Operating Characteristics h h Types NF0-SEW h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( ±% ) LTD operating time at 1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) NF0-HEW NF0-REW Current setting Rated Current Ir: 00~0A In: 0A (Adjustable) LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x( ) ±1% 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s (at 00%) 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x4~x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Current ( % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Max. total breaking time Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Left-side Operating handle Right-side Lead wire AL AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Continuous load current (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. External Accessories (An order for Accessories should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Operating handle F S V F4SW S4SW V4SWF, V4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page Terminal cover Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) (TTC) TTC-4SW (*1) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-4SW Reference page

95 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) 1 4 Bus t max.= ø. Bus t max.= Bus drilling for direct connection Mounting hole 9 Trip button ø1. ø7 Neutral pole ø14 M1 bolt M screw or ø7 1.0mm clearance on each side of handle. Front-plate cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Eddy-current heat-reducing slit Line side -ø L C R Connection allowance M screw or ø M tap or ø Plug-in Plug-in terminal block ø1 M1 bolt Mounting plate 1 M terminal block screw 7. Connection allowance 9 M breaker screw Insulating tube attached to P:Center pole 4P:Center & neutral poles 7 ø 4.. ø Load side M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear Stud attachable in this direction only 7 11 ø1 M1 bolt 1 1. Insulating barrier

96 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF00-CEW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NF00-REW Type NF00-SEW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) V 0V 4V 0V 0V Front connection Rear connection NF00-CEW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NF00-REW 0-00 adjustable 4 4 1/9 /1 /1 / / 0/0 4/4 / / 1/1 / / / / / 1/ 1/ 1/7 Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Operating Characteristics h h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( ±% ) Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) LTD operating time at 1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Ir: 0~00A (Adjustable) Types NF00-CEW NF00-SEW NF00-HEW NF00-REW Rated Current In: 00A LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x4~x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time Current ( % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Internal Accessories Left-side (*1) Operating handle Right-side Lead wire AL AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. External Accessories (*1) (*1) (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Reference page Accessories F FSW Large (TC-L) TCL-SW (*1) Operating handle S S4SW 7 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-SW (*1) V VSWF, VSW 4 Rear (BTC) BTC-SW (*1) Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW (*1) 9 Handle HL HL-4SW Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW lock device HL-S HLS-SW Electrical operation device Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. Terminal cover (*1) Current Reducing Curve Reference page 0 1 Working current correcting ratio (%) 1 0 Reference ambient temperature Ambient temperature ( C) The rated current does not depend on temperature. However, if ambient temperature exceeds C, reduce the continuous working current as left curve. 9

97 Front connection Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness t=1 max Auxiliary handle (removable) 1 Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor 4 R Breake 9 N ø ø. Trip button Neutral pole ø14 M1 bolt ø (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection M tap or ø mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Connection allowance Mounting plate Stud can be rotated M tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent -ø M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 M screw for breaker 1 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block Stud can be rotated Connection allowance M terminal block screw ø1 M1 bolt 11 0 ø

98 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF00-SDW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) NF00-SDW (0), 00 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Time constant not larger than ms DC V / Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) Front connection Rear connection Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 1pc, P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Type NF00-SDW Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min Type NF00-SDW 0A,00A DC Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) min. 0s 0s s Min. Max. Control setting Lo Hi Inst trip current (A) 00± 0±70 0± 0± s Adjustment range 0A 0.s Adjustment range 00A Max. total interrupting time 0.0s Time-delay trip Inst trip % of rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction (*1) (*1) Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient External Accessories (An order for (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. Accessories should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Operating handle F S V FSW S4SW VSWF, VSW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page Terminal cover (*1) Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device (TC-L) TCL-SW (*1) (TTC) TTC-SW (*1) (BTC) BTC-SW (*1) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-SW Reference page Rated ambient C Ambient temperature ( C) 9

99 Front connection 1 Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness t=1 max Auxiliary handle (removable) 1 Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor ø. M tap or ø7 R 9 N ø 1 Trip button Neutral pole ø14 M1 bolt ø (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Connection allowance Mounting plate Stud can be rotated M tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent -ø M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 M screw for breaker 1 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Plug-in Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Plug-in terminal block Connection allowance M terminal block screw 1 1 ø1 M1 bolt 0 ø 1 7 Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF00-SDW is -pole model. and models are available for DC special voltage. () -pole models are models with the central pole removed. 9

100 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF00-UEW Type NF00-UEW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC Standard Attached Parts ( models are provided with auxiliary handle.) V 0V 4V 0V 0V Front connection Rear connection NF00-UEW 0-00 adjustable 4 / 1/1 00/00 00/00 00/00 Mounting screw: P: M, M 1 (pcs each) 4P: M (pcs), M 1 (pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Mounting screw: P: M, M 17 (pcs each) 4P: M (pcs), M 17 (pcs) Operating Characteristics h h Type h NF00-UEW 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( ±% ) Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Ir: 0~00A Rated Current (Adjustable) In: 00A LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x4~x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time Current ( % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) Internal Accessories Left-side (*1) Operating handle Right-side Lead wire AL AX SHT or UVT direction PAL TI (*1) (*1) (*1) Current reducing curve Continuous load current (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side. Remark: (1) refer to page 4. External Accessories (An order for Accessories should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Operating handle F S V FUW(*1) S4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW Reference page 7 9 Terminal cover Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device (TC-L) TCL-UW (*1) (TTC) (BTC) BTC-SW (*1) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-UW Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 97

101 Front connection 1 Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) N 7 Conductor thickness t=1 max. 7 Auxiliary handle (removable) ø ø7 ø7 ø. (ON side) 1. (OFF side) Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor 1 Trip button Neutral pole ø14 M1 bolt ø14 Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) 4 1 (Conductor thickness t= max.) Auxiliary handle (removable) Conductor drilling for direct connection Conductor thickness t= max ø14 ø7 R mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout N 1 ø7 M screw or ø7 Trip button ø14 M1 bolt Neutral pole ø NF0-UEW 14 Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Standard direction of stud is horizontal Connection on power side, and vertical on load side. Mounting plate allowance Otherwise, specify the direction. M tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent ø Mounting plate Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 4-M tap or ø ø1 1 M1 bolt M screw for breaker 1 ø4 0 NF0-UEW ø1 M1 bolt M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. 9

102 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-SEW NF1-SEW Rated current In (Amp.) NF0-SEW 00 Adjustable NF1-SEW 001 Adjustable Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V 4 /1 / /4 /4 1/ 4 /1 / /4 /4 1/ Type NF1-SEW Standard Attached Parts Front connection Rear connection Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Operating Characteristics h h h h Type NF0-SEW h h Type NF1-SEW 0min 0min 1 min min LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Ir:0-0A (Adjustable) Rated Current In:0A 0min 0min 1 min min LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Ir:00-1A (Adjustable) Rated Current In:1A min 0s 0s s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip In x( ) ± % LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is In x( ) ± 1% min 0s 0s s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip In x( ) ± % LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is In x( ) ± 1% 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ± 0% (at 00%) STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ± 0% (at 00%) STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x (4~x1) ± 1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time s 0.0 INST pickup current II x (4~x1) ± 1% (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time Current (of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (of In) Current (of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (of In) Internal Accessories Current reduction curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL Remark: (*1) refer to page 4. AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction PAL Continuous load current (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Reference page Accessories Operating handle F FSW (*1) Auxiliary handle HT-SW S SSW 7 Handle lock (HL) Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW (*1) 9 Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-SW (*1) Electrical operation device Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. Reference page

103 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor thickness t= pcs max. Bolt M1 1 Auxiliary handle (removable) ø9. 1 ø1 M1 bolt Neutral pole ø M tap or ø Rear connection Mounting plate M screw for breaker Stud can be rotated Connection allowance ø Conductor thickness t= pcs max. Bolt M1 4 Insulation cover (removable) mm clearance on each M tap or ø side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout R Plug-in Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate M terminal block screw Stud can be rotated Conductor thickness t= pcs max. Bolt M1 4 0 Connection allowance ø1 Insulating barrier ø

104 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF1-SDW Type NF1-SDW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated shortcircuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Time constant not larger than ms DC V Standard Attached Parts Front connection Rear connection NF1-SDW 0, 1 /0 Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 1pc, P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating cover: (P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Operating Characteristics h h h h min 0min min min Maximum Type NF1-SDW 0A DC min 0min min min Maximum Type NF1-SDW 1A DC min min s 0s 0s s s 4s s 0.s 0.4s Minimum Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) Control Inst. trip setting current(a) L0 00 ± ± 0 0 ± 0 Hi 00 ± 0 s 0s 0s s s 4s s 0.s 0.4s Minimum Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) Control Inst. trip setting current(a) L0 00 ± ± 0 0 ± 0 Hi 00 ± 0 0.s 0.s s Max. total interrupting time 0.0.4s Time 0.0s delay trip Inst. trip s Max. total interrupting time 0.0.4s 0.0s Time delay trip Inst. trip Current ( % of rated current) Current ( % of rated current) Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 0A 1 1A Rated ambient Remark: (1) refer to page Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle F FSW (*1) S SSW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW (*1) Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 7 9 Accessories Auxiliary handle HT-SW Handle lock (HL) Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-SW (*1) Electrical operation device Reference page 0 1 1

105 Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF0-SEW and NF1-SEW. 1 Insulating barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor thickness t= pcs max. Bolt M1 Auxiliary handle (removable) 1 1 ø ø1 M1 bolt ø M screw or ø Rear connection Outside dimensions are different from those of NF0-SEW and NF1-SEW. 1 Mounting plate M screw for breaker Stud can be rotated R11. 1 Connection allowance ø1 4 Conductor thickness t= pcs max Bolt M Insulation cover (removable) M screw or ø mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Plug-in Outside dimensions are different from those of NF0-SEW and NF1-SEW. Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate M terminal block screw Stud can be rotated Connection allowance Conductor thickness t= pcs max. ø1 4 1 Bolt M1 4 Insulating barrier ø Remarks: (1) Standard specifications of NF1-SDW is -pole models. and models are for DC special voltage. () -pole models are models with the central pole removed.

106 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-SEW Rated current In (Amp.) NF0-SEW Adjustable 000 Type NF0-SEW Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Standard Attached Parts AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V Front connection Rear connection 4 /1 / /4 /4 1/ Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Operating Characteristics h h h Type NF0-SEW 0min 0min 1 min LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Current setting Ir:00-0A (Adjustable) Rated Current In:0A min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip In x( ) ± % Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ± 0% (at 00%) LTD operating time TL s ± 0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is In x( ) ± 1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x (4~1) ± 1% (Magnification to In) Current (of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (of In) Max. total breaking time Internal Accessories Current reducing curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL Remark: (1) refer to page 4. AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction PAL Continuous load current (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle F FSW (*1) S SSW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-1SW (*1) Reference page Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 7 9 Accessories Auxiliary handle HT-SW Handle lock (HL) Electrical operation device Reference page 1

107 Front connection Insulating barrier 0 (removable) (1.) 1 ø11 (1.) Conductor thickness t= W7 max. Bolt M Auxiliary handle (removable) 0 Mounting hole 0 1. R N ø17. ø Neutral pole M tap or ø 0 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Connection allowance Stud can be rotated Mounting angle Conductor thickness t= W7 max. Stud can be rotated Mounting angle Conductor thickness t= W7 max. 7 Mounting angle min. max Connection allowance ø11 BM bolt ø11 M bolt M tap or ø 4

108 . Characteristics and Dimensions Molded-Case Circuit s NF0-SDW NF0-SDW Rated current In (Amp.) 0 Number of poles Reted insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated shortcircuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Time constant not larger than msec DC V /0 Type NF0-SDW Standard Attached Parts Front connection Rear connection Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (P: 1pc, P: pcs, 4P: pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min Max. allowable time of Overcurrent Type NF0-SDW for MAG-ONLY 0A DC min 0s 0s s Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) Contro Inst. trip settingl current(a) s Lo Hi 00±00 0±00 0±00 000±00 0.s Max. total interrupting time 0.0s Inst.trip % of rated current Internal Accessories Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Remark: (1) refer to page 4. External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Reference page Accessories Reference page Operating handle Mechanical interlock F FSW (*1) S SSW (MI) MI-1SW (*1) Auxiliary handle HT-SW 7 Handle lock (HL) 9 Electrical operation device Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. 1

109 Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF0-SEW. Insulating barrier (removable) (1.) 0 ø11 1 Conductor thickness t= W7 max. 0 Mounting hole 0 1. R11. ø17. ø9. 97 (1.) Bolt M Auxiliary handle (removable) M tap or ø mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Outside dimensions are different from those of NF0-SEW. Connection allowance Mounting angle ø11 Conductor thickness Mounting angle M bolt t= W7 max. Conductor thickness t= W7 max. 0 Connection allowance Mounting angle 17 min. min. 7 1 Stud can be rotated ø11 1 M bolt 1 Stud is in horizontal direction. Stud can not be rotated 1 1 M tap or ø Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF0-SDW is -pole model. and models are for DC special voltage. () -pole models are models with the central pole removed.

110 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV0-CS Type NV0-CS Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) Rated current In (A) High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max.operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max.operating time at I n (s) Time-delay type Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit 4V breaking capacity (ka) IEC AC 0V Icu/Ics 0V Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) NV0-CS 0 Multi-voltage type Button./ Mounting screw: M (pcs.) Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics h h min 0min min min min s 0s 0s s s 4s Max. Type NV0-CS 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type s s 0.4s Min. 0 0 Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) 0.s s 0.04s 0.0s % of rated current Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL MG Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced upon request. () refer to page. AX Lead wire direction change rate (%) Rated ambient 0 0 Ambient temperature ( C) 0 External Accessories Internal Wiring Diagram Accessories Reference page Accessories Reference page Test button Lock cover () Rail adapter Handle lock device 0CS DIN-0CS HL-0FH Terminal cover Small Large Rear Skeleton (TC-S) (TC-L) (BTC) (TTC) TCS-0CSW TCL-0CSW BTC-0CS TTC-0CS 0 Line side ZCT Load side Magnetic device Senstivity selector Leakage indication button 7

111 Front connection Mtg. hole 7. Test button M screw 14. Applicable wire size:1.mm-dia.to mm ø. ø. ø 4. Leakage indicator button (max) Bus t max. = Bus drilling for direct connection. M4 0.7 taps or ø 7 Rear connection Mtg plate t max =. M4 0.7 taps or ø R (min) (min) ø14 Insulating tube M screw mtg M4 0.7 screw 47 Front-plate cutout

112 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV-SW NV-SW NV-CW NV-HW NV-SW NV-CW NV-SW NV-HW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) High-speed type Max. operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC4V AC0V AC0V () (1) 1 0 (0) 4 Multi-voltage type 0, 00 0 () () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 4 Multi-voltage type 0, 00 0 () () (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 4 Multi-voltage type 0, 00 0 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) 4 Multi-voltage type 0, Button Button Button Button /./1 7./4 / / / 7./4 / / 7./4 1/ /1 Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs) excluding models of NV-CW Type NV-SW Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Max. Types NV-SW NV-CW NV-SW NV-HW 4h h 0min min min 0s s s Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type s Min. 0.s s 0.0s 0.s s 0 0 Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) % of Rated current Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Remark: (1) refer to page. Left-side AL MG TBM Operating handle Right-side AX UVT EAL Lead wire direction change rate (%) Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) 0 External Accessories Internal Wiring Diagram Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V F0SW S0SW V0SWF Reference page 7 4 R (*1) HL HL-S -0SW HLF-0SW HLN-0SW HLS-0SW Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*1) 9 Small TC-S TCS-0SWW Large TC-L TCL-0SWW Skeleton TTC TTC-0SW Rear BTC BTC-0SWW Plug-in PTC PTC-0SWW Reference page 0 Line side Magnetic device Test button Senstivity selector ZCT Load side IEC mm rail adapters DIN-0SW Note: (*1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. 9

113 Front connection Insulation barrier (removable) M 0. screw (M for A) Applicable wire size:1.mm-dia.to mm Mounting hole Sensitivity current selector 4 φ. (.mm-diameter for A) φ. φ Trip button 7 Test button Leakage indicaton button max. (Conductor thickness t= max.) M4 0.7 taps or mm dia.hole 4 7 Conductor drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting panel t=.max Insulation tube 111 R min. M screw M4 0.7 screw for breaker φ14 M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia.hole 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. 7 4 Front-panel cutout Plug-in M 0. terminal block screw 0 Plug-in terminal block Mounting panel (plug-in terminal block) max. Center line of breaker body M screw φ. mm-dia.hole or M 0. taps Details of terminal Conductor drilling cutout for direct connection Cutout and drilling plan Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ. 1

114 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV1-CW NV1-HW Type NV1-SW NV1-SW NV1-CW NV1-SW NV1-HW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles 4 Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) () High-speed type Time-delay type Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC4V AC0V AC0V (7) Multi-voltage type 0, Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type 0, 00 0 *1: P only Notes: (1) The time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 0A or more. () Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 0, ( ) Button / / 0/1 (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 (1) * ( ) Button /1 0/1 / Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, 4P: pcs) excluding models of NV1-CW (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) ( ) Button / / / Operating Characteristics 4h 4h 4h 4h h 0min 0min 1 min Types NV1-CW A~A NV1-SW A~A NV1-HW A~A h 0min 0min 1 min Types NV1-SW 1A~0A NV1-HW 1A~0A h 0min 0min 1 min Types NV1-CW 1A NV1-SW 1A h 0min 0min 1 min Types NV1-SW A NV1-HW A min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. (0A~A) Max. (A~A) min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.0s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4(MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current 0.0s 0.0 Time-delay type s(max) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Time-delay trip % of Rated current Internal Accessories Left-side AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM Instantaneous trip 0 Operating handle Right-side Remark: (1) refer to page. Lead wire direction 0.0s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current Temperature Characteristics Current rating (%) s 0.0 Time-delay trip Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Instantaneous trip Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V R F1SW S1SW V1SW (*1) R1SW 7 4 (*) HL HL-S -1SW HLF-1SW HLN-1SW HLS-1SW Reference page Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*4) 9 Small TC-S TCS-1SWW (*4) Large TC-L TCL-1SWW (*4) Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW(*4) Rear BTC BTC-1SWW (*4) Plug-in PTC PTC-1SWW (*4) IEC mm rail adapters Reference page 0 DIN-1SW (*4) Internal Wiring Diagram Line side Magnetic device Test button Senstivity selector ZCT Load side 111 Electrical operation device Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. (*) Specify the working voltage. (*4) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. MDS-NV1SWE (*) 1 Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

115 Front connection Mounting hole CL Sensitivity current selector CL Insulation barrier (removable) Sensitivity current selector M screw 4 Solderless terminal for wire size 14~/0AWG CU/AL CL CL 11 CL selector (time-delay type) Leakage indication button selector (time-delay type) Leakage indication button 4 Wire connection CL (*1) Test button Test button Trip button Trip button 0 Neutral pole 4 ø M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole max. (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t=. max. Mounting base Stud rotatable by Connection allowance (*1) R1 0 0 φ M bolt 0 M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulation tube 0 M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Plug-in M 0. Terminal block screw 1 Mounting plate (plug-in terminal block) Plug-in terminal block 0 CL CL. 0 CL max Details of terminal M screw 0 9 φ. Conductor drilling for direct connection mm-dia. hole or M 0. taps Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 1 and 111 both sides. Remarks: (1) NV1-CW is available in only. () In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ. 11

116 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV-CW NV-HW Type NV-SW NV-SW NV-CW NV-SW NV-HW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles 4 Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1) High-speed type Time-delay type Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC4V AC0V AC0V Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 4 Multi-voltage type 0, , , ( ) Button 1/ 1/9 / Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type ( ) Button /1 0/1 / Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) ( ) Button /1 /1 / Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s Min. Internal Accessories A Types NV-CW NV-SW NV-HW Max. 1~ A Max.total breaking time Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of rated current Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type 0 0 Temperature Characteristics Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4(MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s(max) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction Curreny rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Remark: (*1) refer to page. External Accessories (*1) Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) Internal Wiring Diagram Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V R FSW SSW VSW (*1) RSW 7 4 (*) HL HL-S -SW HLF-SW HLN-SW HLS-SW Reference page Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*) 9 Small TC-S TCS-SWW (*) Large TC-L TCL-SWW (*) Skeleton TTC TTC-SW (*) Rear BTC BTC-SWW (*) Plug-in PTC PTC-SWW (*) Reference page 0 Line side Magnetic device Test button Senstivity selector ZCT Load side Electrical operation device MDS-NVSWE (*4) 1 Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. (*) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*4) Specify the working voltage. (*) NV-HW model cannot be produced. Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. 11

117 Front connection Mounting hole Trip button CL Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity selector selector (for time-delay type) Leakage indication button Test button CL 1 1 Neutral pole M bolt (Hex-soket) φ φ4. 0 Solderless terminal for wire size 1~17A 14~9mm 00~A ~1mm Wire connection max. φ. M4 0.7 screw or φ CL (Bus t max.=7) 9 Bus drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated CL Connection allowance 1 CL 1 1 CL R1 0 1 M4 0.7 breaker screw ø φ9 M bolt Insulating tube M4 0.7 screw or φ 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout Plug-in 00 Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block Connection allowance 1 CL CL (Terminal block) M Terminal block screw Stud attachable in this direction only 0 φ9 M bolt Insulating barrier 7 φ7 14 Remarks: (1) NV-CW are available in only. () In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ. 114

118 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV-SEW NV-HEW Type NV-SEW Operating Characteristics NV-SEW NV-HEW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles 4 4 Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1) High-speed type Time-delay type Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC4V AC0V AC0V 1 Adjustable 4 4 Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type (0) 00 0 (0) ( ) Button /1 0/1 / Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 1 Adjustable ( ) Button /1 /1 / Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (P: pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: 4pc, 4P: pcs) Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Pre-alarm pickup current IP Ir ( ) ±% Pre-alarm operating time TP TP = TL ±0% (at 00%) INST pickup current Il In (4~1) ±1% Note) Instantaneous tripping current ( % of In) LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) % of Current setting Types NV-SEW NV-HEW Note) Current setting Ir Rated current In 1~A A (Adjustable) STD pickup current Is Ir ( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s Max.total breaking time h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type 0 0 Rated current sensitivity Time-delay type 0.4(MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s(max) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0 0 Internal Accessories Left-side Operating handle Right-side Remark: (*1) refer to page. AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM (*1) PAL Lead wire direction Temperature Characteristics Derating of Load current (%) 1 0 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories Internal Wiring Diagram Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device Reference page F S V R FSW SSW VSW (*1) RSW 7 4 (*) HL HL-S -SW HLF-SW HLN-SW HLS-SW Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SW (*) 9 Small TC-S TCS-SWW (*) Large TC-L TCL-SWW (*) Skeleton TTC TTC-SW (*) Rear BTC BTC-SWW (*) Plug-in PTC PTC-SWW (*) Electrical operation device MDS-NVESWE (*4) Reference page 0 1 Magnetic device Line side Magnetic device Characteristic setting part CT CT CT Test button ZCT Sensitivity selector Load side 11 Notes: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. (*) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. (*) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*4) Specify the working voltage. (*) NV-HEW model cannot be produced. Leakage indication button

119 Front connection Insulating barrier (removable) M bolt (Hex-soket) 4 Note: The setting of selector is available by openning the upper cover. Mounting hole Trip button Test cover Leakage indicator button Current indication LED OVER PAL % Sensitivity selector Operating time selector (for time-delay type) Test button Operating characteristics selector 1 1 Neutral pole (upper cover) φ. 4 1 ø4. 0 Solderless terminal for wire size 1 17A 14 9mm 00 A 1mm Wire connection max. ø. M4 0.7 taps or φ (Bus t max.=7) Bus drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated Connection allowance R φ9 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube ø4 M4 0.7 taps or φ 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout. Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block (Terminal block) Connection allowance M Terminal block screw 0 Stud attachable in this derection only φ9 M bolt Insulating barrier φ

120 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV1-RW NV1-RW Type NV1-RW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) () High-speed type Time-delay type Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) AC4V AC0V AC0V (1) 1 0 (0) (0) (7) 0 4 Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button 1/1 1/1 1/1 Mounting screw : M (4pcs) Insulation barrier : (P:4pcs, 4P:pcs) Notes : (1) The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 0A or more. () Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. Operating Characteristics 4h 4h 4h h h h 0min 0min 1 min Type NV1-RW 1A~A 0min 0min 1 min Type NV1-RW A~A 0min 0min 1 min Type NV1-RW A min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max.(0A~A) Max. (A~A) min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0.0s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current % of Rated current Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4(MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s(max) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Internal Accessories Left-side AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM Operating handle Right-side Lead wire direction Temperature Characteristics Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) 00 Remark: (1) refer to page. External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Mechanical interlock F F1UW S V S1SW V1UW 7 4 R R1UW MI Electrical operation device MI-0SW (*1) Reference page 9 Terminal cover Accessories Small Large Skeleton Rear Plug-in Handle lock device TC-S TC-L TTC BTC (*) HL HL-S Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. TCS-1SWW (*1) TCL-1SWW (*1) TTC-1SW (*1) BTC-1SWW (*1) PTC PTC-1SWW (*1) -1SW HLF-1SW HLN-1SW HLS-1SW Reference page 0 Internal Wiring Diagram Line side Magnetic device Leakage indication button Test button Senstivity selector ZCT Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. Load side 117

121 Front connection Mounting hole CL CL Sensitivity current selector selector (time-delay type) Leakage indication button 4 M screw 4 φ. CL (*1) Test button Trip button max. (Conductor thickness t= max.) 0 M4 7 taps or mm-dia. hole 4 7 Conductor drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t=. max. Stud rotatble by CL CL Mounting base Connection 1 allowance 1 17 CL CL (*1) 17 R M bolt 0 M breaker screw Insulation tube 0 φ1 M4 7 taps or mm-dia. hole 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Plug-in Mounting plate M 0. Terminal block screw (plug-in terminal block) Plug-in terminal block CL max M screw φ mm-dia. hole or M 0. taps Details of terminal Conductor drilling for direct connection Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 171 and 17 both sides. Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ. 11

122 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV-RW NV-RW Type NV-RW Rated current In (Amp.) Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1) High-speed type Time-delay type Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC (Icu/Ics) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC4V AC0V AC0V Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V Multi-voltage type (0) ( ) Button 1/1 1/1 1/1 Mounting screw : M4 0.7 (pcs), M (pcs) Insulation barrier : (4pcs) Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Min. Type NV-RW Max. Max.total breaking time 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4(MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s(max) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0.0s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current Internal Accessories Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) Ambient Compensating Curve 00 Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction Curreny rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Remark: (1) refer to page. External Accessories Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) Internal Wiring Diagram Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F S V FUW SSW VUW 7 4 R RUW (*) HL HL-S -SW HLF-SW HLN-SW HLS-SW Reference page Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock MI MI-0SW (*1) Small TC-S TCS-SWW (*1) Large TC-L TCL-SWW (*1) Skeleton TTC TTC-SW (*1) Rear BTC BTC-SWW (*1) Plug-in PTC PTC-SWW (*1) Electrical operation device Reference page 9 0 Line side Magnetic device Test button Senstivity selector ZCT Load side Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. (*) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. 119

123 Front connection Mounting hole Trip Button CL CL Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity selector selector (for time-delay type) Leakage indication button Test button 1 7 M bolt (Hex-socket) φ φ4. Solderless terminal for wire size 1~17A 14~9mm 00~A ~1mm Wire connection max φ. (Bus t max.=7) 01 M4 0.7 screw or φ Bus drilling for direct connection Rear connection Mounting plate t max.=. Insulating tube Stud can be rotated CL CL CL Connection 19 CL R1 allowance φ9 M bolt M4 0.7 breaker screw Insulating tube ø4 M4 0.7 screw or φ 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block 4. CL (Terminal block) 7 CL Connection allowance CL M Terminal block screw Stud attachable in this direction only 0 φ9 M bolt Insulating barrier 7 φ7 Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.

124 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV0-CW NV0-SW Type NV0-SW NV0-CW NV0-SW Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1) -4 Multi-voltage type Rated current In (Amp.) 00 0 High-speed Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) (0) 00 0 type Max. operating time at I n (s) 0.04 Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) ( 00 0 ) Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) ( ) Inertial non-operating time at I n (s) ( ) Earth-leakage indication system Button Rated short-circuit 4V /1 4/4 breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- AC 0V /1 4/4 (lcu/lcs) 0V / / Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M 0 (4pcs) (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (4pcs) Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s Min. Types NV0-CW NV0-SW Max. NV0-CW NV0-SW 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0.s Max. total breaking time 0 0 Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) 0.0s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Current ( % of rated current) Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Reference ambient temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Remark: (1) refer to page 4 and 47. External Accessories (An order for Accessories should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Reference page Accessories Reference page Internal Wiring Diagram Test button Operating handle F S V F4SWNV S4CW, S4SW V4SWNV,V4SWFNV Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4CW, HT-4SW Large Skeleton Rear (TC-L) TCL-4SW (TTC) TTC-4SW (BTC) BTC-4SW Handle lock device HL HL-S HL-4CW, HL-4SW HLS-4SW Electrical operation device Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. Terminal cover 0 1 Line side Magnetic device Sensitivity selector ZCT Load side Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. 11

125 Front connection 1 Insulating barrier (removable) 1 4 Conductor thickness t= max. 94. Mounting hole Trip button Sensitivity current selector selector (Time-delay type) Leakage indication button Test button ø1. 47 ø7 1 ø. 194 R ø14 M1 bolt Conductor thickness t= max. Conductor drilling for direct connection (NV0-SP) 14(NV0-CP) M tap or ø mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated C Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent Line side -ø 4 Connection allowance M tap or ø M tap or ø7 11 ø1 M1 bolt 1 7 M screw for breaker Insulation tube 7 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in 0 Plug-in terminal block 4 Mounting plate M terminal block screw Connection allowance ø1 M1 bolt 7 Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier ø 1 1

126 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV0-REW Type NV0-SEW Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) Rated current In (Amp.) High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Max. inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu/Ics) AC 4V 0V 0V NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV0-REW 4 4 4/4 / / -4 Multi-voltage type 00-0 adjustable (0) ( 00 0 ) ( ) ( ) Button / / / Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) (Front connection) Insulation barrier: (P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. 1/ 1/ 1/7 Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics h h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x ( ) ±% LTD operating time at 1% 0s (TL=1s set) s (TL=s set) 0s (TL= 0s set) 0s (TL= set) 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Types NV0-SEW NV0-HEW NV0-REW Current setting Rated current Ir: 00-0A In: 0A (Adjustable) LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Is Ir x ( ) ±1% Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0 s 0. ± 0.04 s 0.1 ± 0.0 s 0.0 ± 0.0 s 0 0 Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) 0.0s 0.0 INST pickup current II x 4 ~ x1 ±1% (Magnification to In) Current setting (% to Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% to In) Max. total breaking time Internal Accessories Left-side Operating handle Right-side External Accessories (An order for Accessories AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM PAL Operating handle F S V F4SWNV S4SW V4SWNV,V4SWFNV Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW Note: (*1) This is for NV0-SEW. (*) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. TI should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Reference page Terminal cover Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device Lead wire direction Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. () refer to page 4 and 47. (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) (*) (TTC) TTC-4SW (*) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) (*) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-4SW Reference page 0 1 Current reducing curve Continuous load current (%) 1 0 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) Internal Wiring Diagram Magnetic device N Line side Magnetic device Characteristic setting part CT CT CT Test button ZCT Sensitivity selector In case of 4P Load side 1 Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

127 Front connection 1 Mounting hole Trip button Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity current selector selector (Time-delay type) Leakage indication button Test button ø14 M1 bolt Conductor thickness t= max. 4 7 Neutral pole ø1. ø7 ø. Conductor thickness t= max. Conductor drilling for direct connection M tap or ø7 194 R mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Front-panel cutout 9 Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated C Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent L C Line side -ø Connection allowance M tap or ø M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 7. M screw for breaker Insulation tube ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 0 4 M terminal block screw Connection allowance ø1 M1 bolt 7. Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier ø

128 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV0-CW NV0-SW Type NV0-SW Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) Rated current In (Amp.) High-speed type Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu/Ics) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Max. inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC 4V 0V 0V NV0-CW NV0-SW -4 Multi-voltage type Button /1 4/4 /1 / / / Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (4pcs) Operating Characteristics Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s Min. Types NV0-CW NV0-SW Max. 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time 0.s Max. total breaking time Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) 0.0s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Reference ambient temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Remark: (1) refer to page 4 and 47. External Accessories External Accessories (An order for Accessories Operating handle F S V F4SWWNV S4SW V4SW, V4SWF Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Reference page Large Skeleton Rear (TC-L) TCL-4SW (TTC) TTC-4SW (BTC) BTC-4SW Handle lock device HL HL-S HL-4SW HLS-4SW Electrical operation device Terminal cover Accessories Reference page 0 1 Internal Wiring Diagram Line side Magnetic device Test button Sensitivity selector ZCT Load side Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. 1

129 Front connection Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity selector 1 4 Bus t max.= 9 Mounting hole Trip button Operating-time selector (time-delay type) Leakage-indicator button Test button ø14 M1 bolt Neutral Pole 9 ø ø7 0 1 Bus t max.= ø. Bus drilling for direct connection M screw or ø7 194 R 11 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout 9 Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Eddy-current heat-reducing slit Line side -ø Connection allowance M screw or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 M breaker 7 screw Insulated tube 7. ø 4.. Plug-in Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 4 4-M tap or ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. 0 M terminal block Mounting screw Connection allowance 9 ø ø1 M1 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier Note: NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-HEW is only the pole of. 1

130 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV0-SEW NV0-HEW Type NV0-SEW Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) Rated current In (Amp.) High-speed Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) type Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Max. inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- (Icu/Ics) Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) AC 4V 0V 0V Notes: (*1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 00-4V. NV0-SEW NV0-HEW 4-4 Multi-voltage type 4/4 / / 00-0 adjustable (0) ( 00 0 ) ( ) ( ) Button / / / Mounting screw: M 7 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: 4pcs, 4P: pcs) Operating Characteristics h Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x( )±% INST pickup current II In x(4~1) ±1% (Magnification to In) LTD operating time TL s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Isd Ir x( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s Max.total breaking time Internal Accessories Left-side Operating handle Right-side External Accessories (An order for h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s s 0.0 Accessories Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) Current (% to Ir) Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In) Types NV0-SEW NV0-HEW AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM PAL Operating handle F S V F4SWNV S4SW V4SWF, V4SW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW (*1) Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) (TL=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. TI should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Reference page Terminal cover Current setting Ir:00~0A (Adjustable) Large Skeleton Rear Handle lock device Accessories Electrical operation device Rated Current In:0A Lead wire direction Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. () refer to page 4 and 47. (TC-L) TCL-4SW (*1) (TTC) TTC-4SW (*1) (BTC) BTC-4SW (*1) HL HL-4SW HL-S HLS-4SW Reference page 0 1 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) Current reducing curve Continuous load current (%) Internal Wiring Diagram Magnetic device N Line side Magnetic device 1 0 Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Ambient temperature ( C) Characteristic setting part CT CT CT Rated nonoperating current Rated ambient Time-delay type. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Test button ZCT Sensitivity selector Rated nonoperating current In case of 4P Time-delay type s. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Load side 17 Leakage indication button Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

131 Front connection Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity selector 1 4 Bus t max.= 9 Mounting hole Trip button Operating-time selector (time-delay type) Leakage-indicator button Test button ø14 M1 bolt Neutral Pole 9 ø ø7 0 1 Bus t max.= ø. Bus drilling for direct connection M screw or ø7 194 R 11 1mm clearance on each side of handle Front-plate cutout 9 Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Mounting plate Stud can be rotated Eddy-current heat-reducing slit Line side -ø Connection allowance M screw or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 M breaker 7 screw Insulated tube 7. ø 4.. Plug-in Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 4 4-M tap or ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Load side Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. 0 M terminal block Mounting screw Connection allowance 9 ø ø1 M1 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only Insulating barrier Note: NV0-CW, NV0-SW, NV0-HEW is only the pole of. 1

132 . Characteristics and Dimensions Earth-Leakage Circuit s NV00-SEW NV00-HEW Type NV00-SEW Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) Rated current In (Amp.) High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time at I n (s) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Time-delay type Max. operating time at I n (s) Max. inertial non-operating time at I n (s) Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit 4V breaking capacity (ka) IEC0947- AC 0V (Icu/Ics) 0V Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) NV00-SEW NV00-HEW -4 Multi-voltage type 0-00 adjustable ( 00 0 ) (0.04) Button 4/4 / / / / / Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (pcs) Operating Characteristics h Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir ( s ) ±% 0.s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±0% (at 00%) LTD operating time at-1% 0s(TL=1s set) s(tl=s set) 0s(TL= 0s set) 0s(TL= set) Types NV00-SEW NV00-HEW Current setting Ir:0~00A (Adjustable) Rated Current In:00A LTD operating time TL 1 0 1s ±0% (at 00%) STD pickup current Isd Ir ( ) ±1% STD operating time Ts 0. ± 0.0s 0. ± 0.04s 4h h 0min min min 0s s s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0 Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Highspeed type 0 0 Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type 0.4. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) ( % of rated current sensitivity) Rated nonoperating current Time-delay type s. (MAX) Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time Current (% to Ir) Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In) Max.total breaking time Internal Accessories Left-side s 0.0 Operating handle Right-side INST Pickup current Ii In x(4~) ±1% (Magnification to In) AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM PAL TI 0.1 ± 0.0s 0.0 ± 0.0s Lead wire direction Current reducing curve Working current correcting ratio (%) 1 Reference ambient temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. () refer to page 4 and 47. External Accessories (An order for Accessories Operating handle should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) F S V FSWNV S4SW VSWF, VSW Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-SW Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW Reference page Large Skeleton Rear (TC-L) TCL-SW (TTC) TTC-SW (BTC) BTC-SW Handle lock device HL HL-S HL-4SW HLS-SW Electrical operation device Terminal cover Accessories Reference page 0 1 Internal Wiring Diagram Magnetic device Line side Magnetic device Characteristic setting part CT CT CT Leakage indication button Test button ZCT Sensitivity selector Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ. Load side 19

133 Front connection Mounting hole 1 Trip button Insulating barrier (removable) Sensitivity current selector selector (Time-delay type) Leakage indication button Test button Conductor thickness t=1 max. ø ø ø. 1 Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor (Conductor thickness t= max.) Conductor drilling for direct connection 4 M tap or ø7 R 17 Front-panel cutout 9 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. Rear connection Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers () Connection allowance Mounting plate Stud can be rotated M tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent -ø M tap or ø ø1 M1 bolt 1 M screw for breaker 1 ø M4 screw Add these tapped holes in positions to standard boring. Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear. Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block Stud can be rotated Connection allowance M terminal block screw ø1 M1 bolt 0 1 ø 17

134 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-SWU NF-SWU Rated current In (Amp.) () Number of poles Rated short-circuit braking capacity (ka) UL49 IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Standard attached parts Rated voltage (AC V) AC V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC 0V 4V 0V 0V /4 7./4 7./4 1/ Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs) Type NF-SWU Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min Type NF-SWU min 0s 0s s Max. s Min. 0.s s % of Rated current Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Left-side -pole Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction change rate (%) Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories Accessories Accessories F0SWUP F F0SWU Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SWU Operating handle S S0SWU V V0SWUF (*1) Terminal Large TC-L TCL-0SWU cover TCL-0SWU Handle lock device HL HLF-0SWU Note: (*1) Adjustable types can be produced upon request. 11

135 Front connection CL Mounting hole Insulation barrier (removable) M 0. screw (M for A) 4 φ. 1. max. (Conductor thickness t= max.) CL φ. Conductor drilling for direct connection Trip button φ pole M4 0.7 taps or mm dia.hole R pole -pole Front-panel cutout 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. 1

136 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-CWU NF-SWU Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C (IEC0 C) NF-CWU 0 7 NF-SWU Number of poles Rated voltage (AC V) Y/77 UL 49 Y/77V AC V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 00 V /4 IEC V 7./4 1/9 JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) AC 4V 0V / / /1 0/1 0V 0/1 / DC V 7./4 1/ Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (pcs) Insulation barrier: (P: pcs, P: 4pcs), Insulation board: (1pc) Type NF-SWU Operating Characteristics 4h 4h h h 0min 0min 1 min Types NF-CWU A~A NF-SWU A~A 0min 0min 1 min Type NF-SWU 1A~0A min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. (0A~A) Max. (A,A) min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. 0.s 0.s s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side -pole Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device Accessories F F1SWUP F1SWU Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SWU S S1SWU V V1SWU (*1) Terminal Large TC-L TCL-1SWU cover TCL-1SWU HL HLF-1SWU Note: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. 1

137 Front connection (Standard) CL Insulation barrier (removable) φ CL Mounting hole CL 4 M screw 4 (Conductor thickness t= max) 19 max. Conductor drilling for direct connection Trip button pole Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option) Solderless terminal CL.0 Hexagon socket set screw wire size 14~1/0AWG CU/AL -pole -pole CL CL 0 0 CL CL CL R 1 (Insulation plate) (Line) -pole 0 M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole 7 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame. CAUTION: When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. 0mm air gap to cover or 0.mm fibre insulating plate extending 1.7mm out from each side of breaker. Front-panel cutout 14

138 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-CWU Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C (IEC0 C) NF-CWU Number of poles Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) UL 49 IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Standard attached parts Rated voltage (AC V) AC V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC 0V 4V 0V 0V V 00 / 1/ 1/9 /1 / (*1) Mounting screw: M4 0.7 (pcs) Insulation barrier: (4pcs), Terminal cover: (1 set), (*) Type NF-CWU Notes: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page, the models can be used for up to 0 V DC. (*) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP0 (finger protection) structure. Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min Type NF-CWU min min 0s 0s s Max. s Min. 0.s 0. Max. total breaking time s 0.0 Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Curreny rating (%) 1 Rated ambient Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F FSWU S SSWU V VSWU (*1) HL HLF-SWU Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Note: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. Ml MI-0SWU Large TC-L TCL-SWU 1

139 Front connection Mounting hole Trip button Insulating barrier 1 1 M bolt (Hex-soket) φ. 4 φ CL CL 1 CL R1 φ. max. Bus t max.=7 M4 0.7 screw or φ Front cover cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle Bus drilling for direct connection 1

140 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C (IEC0 C) (1) (1) Number of poles Rated voltage (AC V) 00Y/47 00Y/47 00Y/47 UL 49 00Y/47V AC V V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) V / / 1/1 IEC V 0/0 0/0 / JIS C 01-4V / / / AC (Icu/Ics) 0V / / / 0V / / / DC V (*1) 0/0 0/0 0/0 Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) Mounting screw: M (4pcs) Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs), Insulation board: (1pc) Note: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page, the models can be used for up to 0 V DC. Type NF-SFW Operating Characteristics 4h 4h 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Type NF-SFW 1A~A Max.(A) Max.(1A~0A) h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Max.(0A~1A) Max.(A) Type NF-SFW A~1A h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s Min. Max. Type NF-SJW/HJW 1A~A Instantaneous trip adjustment range Position AC of notch x In (%) 4 0± ±00 s s s 0.s 0. Max. total breaking time 0.s 0. (0A~1A) (A) Max. total breaking time 0.s 0. Adjustable range Max. total breaking time s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of Rated current % of Rated current % of Rated current Internal Accessories Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT External Accessories Lead wire direction Ambient Compensating Curve Current rating (%) Rated ambient 0 0 Ambient temperature ( C) (rated ambient C) Remark: The reference ambient temperature for IEC models is 0 C. 0 Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F FGSWU S SGSWU V VGSWU (*1) HL HLF-GSWU Terminal cover Accessories Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-0SWU Large TC-L TCL-GSWU Note: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. 17

141 Front connection (Standard) Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Hex.socket head M bolt 4 CAUTION: Insulating barriers must be used with uninsulated bus bars or climp on terminals φ. φ4. 4 max. Trip button ø. (Conductor thickness t=7max.) 79 Bus bar drilling for direct connection 4 4-FRONT 1 Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option) Mounting hole Hexagon socket set screw Wire size 14AWG-MCM CU/AL Trip button ø. φ FRONT 1 R1 CAUTION: When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. mm air gap to cover or extending 1.7mm out fromeach side of breaker mm clearance on each side of M4 0.7 taps or mm-dia. hole the handle frame. Front-panel cutout -RIGHT Insulation plate (Line) Outline and dimensions (mm (inch)) Type NF-SFW,NF-SJW,NF-HJW 1

142 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-SKW Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C NF-SKW 00 0 Number of poles Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) UL 49 IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Rated voltage (AC V) AC 00Y/47V V V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V 00Y/47 0 / (/) (*1) 0/0 (/) (*1) 4/4 (/) (*1) 4/4 (/) (*1) / (/) (*1) Type NF-SKW Notes: (*1) In case of solderless ter minal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/). Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min Type NF-SKW min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. 0.s Max.total interrupting time 0.0s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL NF-SKW AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient (*1) (rated ambient C) Ambient temperature ( C) (*1) External Accessories (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for left-side. Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F F4SKW S S4SKW V V4SKW (*1) HL HL-4SP Ter minal cover Accessories Large TC-L TCL-4SKW Note: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. 19

143 Front connection (Solderless terminal) Hexagon socket set screw Solderless terminal ~0A Tightening torque 7lb-in. (1.1N m) Mounting hole Trip button 7 φ1. φ7 47 UL Ampere ratings A, 00A A A, 0A Wire size -MCM CU MCM AL /0AWG CU ONLY IEC Ampere ratings Wire size (IEC 0) Class Class (max.141) 7 1 A~A ~1mm 9~1mm 0A 1~mm 1~1mm Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. Standard attached parts Mounting screw:m 0 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc) Front connection (Busbar terminal) Insulating barrier (removable) Bus t max. t Mounting hole 7 Trip button φ1. φ7 47 φ1 CAUTION (max.141) 97 7 Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case. Standard attached parts Mounting screw:m 0 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc) 1 R When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. mm air gap to cover or 0.mm fibre insulating plate extending 1.7mm out from each side of breaker dia. holes 11 or M taps 1mm clearance on each side of handle. Insulating plate Front-panel cutout (Line) 1

144 . Characteristics and Dimensions UL49 Listed Molded-Case Circuit s NF-SLW Rated current In (Amp.) at ambient temperature C NF-SLW 0 00 Number of poles Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (ka) UL 49 IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Rated voltage (AC V) AC 00Y/47V V V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC V 0V 4V 0V 0V 00Y/47 0 / 0/0 4/4 4/4 / Type NF-SLW Operating Characteristics 4h h 0min 0min 1 min min min 0s 0s s s Min. Max. Type NF-SLW Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) Control setting Lo Hi Inst. trip current (%) 0± ±00 Adjustable range of inst. pick up current 0.s Max. total interrupting time 0.0s Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip % of rated current Internal Accessories Ambient Compensating Curve Left-side Operating handle Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT Lead wire direction Current rating (%) 1 Rated ambient (*1) (*1) (rated ambient C) Ambient temperature ( C) (*1) (*1) Note: (*1) Right-side is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for left-side. External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device F FSLW S S4SKW V VSLW (*1) HL HL-4SP Ter minal cover Accessories Note: (*1) Attach the letter F to the end of designation for a fixed type. Large TC-L TCL-SLW 141

145 Front connection (Solderless terminal) Solderless termianl Hexagon socket set screw Mounting hole Tightening torque 7lb-in. (1.1N m) 4 7 Trip button φ14 φ 1 UL Ampere ratings Wire size 0A, 00A -0MCM CU ONLY 1 Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. Standard attached parts Mounting screw:m (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc) IEC Wire size (IEC 0) Ampere ratings Class Class 0A, 00A 9~1mm ~1mm Front connection (Busbar terminal) Insulating barrier (removable) Bus t max. t Mounting hole 1 Trip button φ14 φ φ Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case. Standard attached parts Mounting screw:m (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc) 1 R CAUTION When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. mm air gap to cover or 0.mm fibre insulating plate extending 1.7mm out from each side of breaker dia. holes or M taps 17 1mm clearance on each side of handle. Insulating plate Front-panel cutout (Line) 14

146 . Characteristics and Dimensions Miniature Circuit s BH BH-P Type Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature C 1 BH,, 1 BH-P,, Rated voltage (V) AC DC Breaking capacity AC0/0V IEC09 AC0V (ka) sym. DC1V 0/ /0 1 1 Type BH Type BH-P Operating Characteristics Ambient Compensating Curve 4h Operating Characteristics h Type:BH, BH-P 1 Rated Current:, A Amb. temp.: C 1 0min 0min 1 min min min Current rating (%) , A Rated ambient 0s 9 0s s Max Ambient temperature ( C) s Min. 0.s s % of rated current Outside Dimension Diagram BH Mtg bracket M 0. screw (line side & load side) BH-P M x 0. screw Plug-in terminal (line side) center Mtg hole ø Mtg slot Bus t max. =4 ø pole -pole 1. Bus drilling 4. Note: Two brackets are used for single-pole breakers. and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers. 1-pole -pole 14 14

147 BH-S Type Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature C Rated voltage (V) AC DC Breaking capacity AC0/0V IEC09 AC0V (ka) sym. DC1V 1,, 1, 0, (), 0,,, 0 0/0 BH-S M, 1, 0, (), 0,,, , 0, (), 0,,, ,, 1, 0, (), 0,,, 0 0/0 BH-S M, 1, 0, (), 0,,, , 0, (), 0,,, Type BH-S Operating Characteristics Ambient Compensating Curve 4h 1 h 0min 0min 1 min min min Operating Characteristics Type:BH-S Rated Current:~0A Amb. temp.: C Current rating (%) A 1-A 0A A -0A Rated ambient Max. 0s 0s s Min Ambient temperature ( C) s 0.s Type B Type C Type D 0.0s % of rated current Outside Dimension Diagram BH-S Mtg bracket M 0. screw (line side & load side) Mtg hole ø Bus t max. =4 ø.. 1-pole -pole 1. 1 Bus drilling Note: Two brackets are used for single-pole breakers. and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers. 1

148 . Characteristics and Dimensions Miniature Circuit s BH-PS Type Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature C Rated voltage (V) AC DC Breaking capacity AC0/0V IEC09 AC0V (ka) sym. DC1V 1, 1, 0, 0,,, 0 0/0 BH-PS M, 1, 0, 0,,, , 0, 0,,, ,, 1, 0, (),,,, 0 0/0 9 BH-PS M9, 1, 0, (), 0,,, 0 0 9, 1, 0, (),,,, 0 0 Type BH-PS Operating Characteristics Ambient Compensating Curve 4h 1 h 0min 0min 1 min min Operating Characteristics Type:BH-PS Rated Current:~0A Amb. temp.: C Current rating (%) A, A A A, 0A, A A, 0A Rated ambient min 9 Max. 0s 0s s Min Ambient temperature ( C) s 0.s 0. Type B Type C Type D s % of rated current Outside Dimension Diagram BH-PS Plug-in terminal (line side) M x 0. screw Mtg slot pole -pole 14 14

149 . Characteristics and Dimensions DIN Series BH-D MCB BH-D (IEC09) Number of poles 1 4 (+N) (1+N) Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C,, 1, 1, 0,,,,,,, 1, 1, 0,,,,,,, 1, 1, 0,,,,,,, 1, 1, 0,,,,,,, 1, 1, 0,,, Rated voltage (VAC) 0/ Breaking capacity (ka) sym. (IEC09) Type BH-D Operating Characteristics Min s Min s Tripping Characteristics Type:BH-D Rated Current:A-A Amb. temp.:0 C Tripping Characteristics Type:BH-D Rated Current:A-A Amb. temp.:0 C Max. 1 0 Max. Tripping time Min. B C Tripping time Min. -A 1-A D 0.0 Max total tripping time % of rated current % of rated current Ambient Compensating Curve 1 Outside Dimension Diagram BH-D M screw Neutral Pole 1 N N Current ratings (%) Rated ambient N N Ambient temperature ( C) Insulation Barrier(Option) 17 maximum Solderless terminal 1-pole 1+N-pole -pole 14

150 . Characteristics and Dimensions DIN Series BH-DN MCB Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C Rated voltage (VAC) Breaking capacity (ka) sym. (IEC09) BH-DN (IEC09) (1+N),, 1, Type BH-DN Operating Characteristics Min Sec Max Tripping Characteristics Type : BH-DN Rated current : A~0A Amb.temp. : 0 C Min 1 Tripping time Max.total tripping time Rated current Outside Dimension Diagram BH-DN M4 SCREW 1.4 N N 4 maximum 17 Solderless Terminal 4 147

151 BV-D RCCB Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C Rated voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time (sec) at I Pulsating current sensitivity Rated conditional short-cirrent (ka) BV-D (IEC) (1+N) 4 (+N),, 0 0/0 0, Type AC Type BV-D Operating Characteristics h 0min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s 0.s Rated nonoperating current sensitivity Rated current sensitivity 0.0s Ground fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) Outside Dimension Diagram BV-D Residual M screw Test button indicator Neutral pole N 4 4. N maximum Solderless terminal -pole 14

152 . Characteristics and Dimensions DIN Series BV-DN RCBO Number of poles Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C Rated voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity I n (ma) Max. operating time (sec) at I n Pulsating current sensitivity Breaking capacity (ka) sym (IEC9) BV-DN (IEC9) (1+N),, 1, 0,, 0 0,, Type AC 4. Type BV-DN Operating Characteristics Leakage Tripping characteristics Min Sec Tripping Characteristics Type : BV-DN Rated current : A~A Amb.temp. : 0 C 4h h 0min min Max min 0s s s 0.s Rated nonoperating current Rated current sensitivity Min s 1 0.0s Tripping time Rated current Outside Dimension Diagram M4 Screw Test button.4 Residual indicator 4 maximum Max.total tripping time Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) BV-DN N N 4 Solderless terminal 149

153 KB-D Isolating switch Number of poles Utilization category Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 0 C Rated voltage (VAC) Shot time withstand current (A) Shot-circuit making capacity (A) KB-D (IEC0947-) 1 4 (+N) ACA class,, In, 0 In Type KB-D Outside Dimension Diagram KB-D M screw Neutral Pole N N Insulation Barrier(Option) 17 maximum Solderless terminal 1-pole -pole 1

154 . Characteristics and Dimensions Circuit Protectors CP0-BA Type CP0-BA Number of poles Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv) Rated current (A) Rated shortcircuit capacity (ka) AC-DC common use Operating characteristics Mode of tripping UL77 CSA C. No. IEC 094 EN 094 GB 171 JIS C 4 EN IEC JIS C 01- (Icu/Ics) Frame (A) 0 Type CP0-BA Rated voltage (V) AC DC AC (V) DC (V) , 0., 0., 0., 1,,,, 7,,1, 0, 0 1.kA at V.kA at V.kA at 1V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC.kA at 0V DC.kA at 0V.kA at V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC./.kA at 0V DC./.kA at 0V./.kA at V Instantaneous type (I) Medium type (M),(MD) Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F) Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F):hydraulic-magnetic Operating Characteristics h min 0min min min min Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S) AC DC h min 0min min min min DC AC h min 0min min min min DC AC h min 0min min min min DC AC 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0.s 0.s 0.s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0s s Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Outside Dimension Diagram CP0-BA Terminal cover Terminal cover Terminal cover Terminal cover IEC mm rail h min 0min min min min Medium type with inertial delay (MD) h min 0min min min min Slow type with inertial delay (SD) ON ON 4 ON s 0s s s 0s 0s s s AXc AXb AXa 1-pole Mounting dimension AXc -pole AXb AXa 4 AXc AXb AXa 14 Mounting hole ø4. Terminal cover for attached terminal block.. Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal block (Ic contact) Attachable on right-side only Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M. (Plus minus self-up screw) (The figure shows auxiliary switch. Example: Alarms are ALa, ALb and ALc.) Main terminal (Plus minus self-up screw) M4 0A max. M 0A 0.s s Current (% of rated current) Temperature Characteristics variation (%) s s Current (% of rated current) Rated ambient pole -pole -M tap -M tap -M4 tap Tightening torque 1~1.4 (N-m) (Rated ambient C) 11

155 CP-S Type CP-S Frame (A) 0 Type CP-S Number of poles 1 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kv). Rated current (A) Rated shortcircuit capacity (ka) AC-DC common use Operating characteristics Mode of tripping UL77 IEC 094 EN 094 (Icn) JIS C 4 (Icn) AC (V) Rated voltage (V) DC (V) AC DC Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) AC DC 0.0, 0.1, 0., 0., 0., 0.7 1,,.,,, 7, 7.,,1, 0,, 0 1.kA at V 1kA at V 1.kA at 0V,.kA at V 1kA at 0V 1kA at V (1kA at 0V) 1kA at 0V 1.kA at V,.kA at 1V 1kA at V 1kA at 1V (1kA at V) 1kA at V Instantaneous type (I) Medium type (M),(MD) Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F),(FD) Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F, FD):hydraulic-magnetic Operating Characteristics Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S) Medium type with inertial delay (MD) h h h h h min min min min min 0min 0min 0min 0min 0min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0s 0s s s 0.s 0.s 0.s 0.s 0.s s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Current (% of instantaneous tripping current set value) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) h Current (% of rated current) Fast type with inertial delay (FD) h Current (% of rated current) Slow type with inertial delay (SD) Outside Dimension Diagram CP-S Series <With auxiliary switch (AX), With series alarm switch (AL)> Switch <With switch type auxiliary switch (AX)> Main terminal Mail tab terminal nominal (.W 0.L) min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s min 0min min min min 0s 0s s s LINE 0.s 0. 0.s Alarm auxiliary switch terminal Tab terminal nominal 1 (.W 0.L) LORD s Current (% of rated current) s Current (% of rated current) M 0. tap (Depth ) M 0. tap (Depth ) M 0. tap (Depth ) Temperature Characteristics 00 ø ø Single pole -pole. ø variation (%) Rated ambient (Rated ambient C) 1

156 7. Ordering Information Molded-Case Circuit s Earth-Leakage Circuit s NF-SW C S NF H U MB Economy type Standard type High-performance type Ultra current-limiting type Motor braker NV-SW NV C S H U Economy type Standard type High-performance type Ultra current-limiting type Number of poles Number of poles P NV 1øW P NF MB P, P, 4P P P P NV 1øW 1øW øw Rated current 00A Even for adjustable rated current models, the working current should be specified. Rated current 00A 4P NV ø4w Even for adjustable rated current models, the working current should be specified. Rated voltage Secify DC voltage when for use in DC circuit Rated voltage AC AC -4V 00-4V Standard Specify the applicable marine standards CE is standard. Rated sensitivity current 00 0mA 0mA 00 0mA Connection method B F SL B PM Front connection Solderless (box) terminal Rear connection Pulg-in Standard Specify CE, if necessery Built-in Accessories PAL PAL OAL CYL Pre-alarm (contact output) Overcurrent alarm Cylinder keylock Connection method B F SL B PM Front connection Solderless (box) terminal Rear connection Pulg-in Internal accessories AL, SHT (AC1V) External accessories AL AX SHT UVT SLT INT Alarm switch Auxiliary switch Shunt trip (Specify rated coil voltage.) Under voltage trip (Specify rated coil voltage.) Lead-wire terminal block Internal terminal type Type of residual carrent protection Built-in Accessories MG Blank Specify MG EAL TBM PAL High-speed type Time-delay type Insulation switch Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch Test button module Pre-alarm module Quantity MD F S V S I W MI TC HL HL-S CH Electrical operation device Operating handle Enclosure box Mechanical interlock Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC) Handle lock device Card holder Internal accessories AX, SLT, TBM External accessories AL AX UVT SLT MD F S V S I W MI Alarm switch Auxiliary switch Under voltage trip (Specity rated coil voltage) Lead-wire terminal block Electrical operation device Operating handle Enclosure box Mechanical interlock Quantity TC Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC) HL HL-S Handle lock device CH Card holder 1

157 . Melshort A more rational and easier breakers selections This software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity and the related equipments Calculation and selection software for low-voltage circuit breakers Preparation of single-line diagram Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments Short-circuit current calculation Examination of cascade interruption combination Examination of selective interraption Contents of a software The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current calculations but also the examination of various protection coordination. Preparation of single-line connection diagrams. Short-circuit calculations. Automatic selection of breaker type. Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination. Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination. Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection equipments. Protection coordination with motor start current. products menu Advantages Improvement of selection efficiency Because the coordination between various protection systems can be examined and breakers can be selected interactively using the personal computer screen, simple, accurate and speedy operation is ensured. Maintenance of a software The user can download the latest software updates by accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page on the Internet. Personal computer specifications 7 Low-voltage circuit breaker: MCCBs, EBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors, Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs Operating system: Windows 9/9/NT4.0/000/XP CPU: 1 MHz or faster RAM memory size: min MB Free hard disk capacity: min MB Display resolution: min dots CD-ROM Drive: Double speed or higher 14

158 9. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS TECHNICAL Advantages Substantial menu Wide ranging technical information is classified into groups. Expert oriented information In addition to catalogs, including previous catalog editions and technical data and other information, users get answers to their technical questions. Enhanced information collection efficiency By connecting your personal computer to the Internet, you can access the latest information simply and quickly without a need to increase storage space. Model menu Molded-Case Circuit s (MCCB) Earth-Leakage Circuit s (EB) Miniature Circuit s (MCB) Since 19, when Japan's first molded case circuit breaker was released, we have continuously provided circuit breakers with monitors to ensure uninterrupted power supplies, the world's first harmonics current proof and surge proof IC earth leakage circuit breakers, and other new products as needed. We have completed a t Century progressive super services for the circuit breaker. In doing so, we have focused on urgently required advanced technology and futuristic ease of use. Circuit Protectors (CP) Air Circuit s (ACB) Compact, high-performance protectors against short-circuit and overload, and for control circuit operation for electronic equipment, office machinery, and machine tools. All models have electronic tripping relays ensuring high reliability and excellent performance. 1

159 INFORMATION SERVICE VIA THE INTERNET Catalogue The latest catalogue and old editions are displayed for reading as is. Technical Infomation Access technical and maintenance data on our low-voltage switchgear. Selection (Available soon) Downloading to the latest CD-ROM software version (purchased separately) ensuring easy short circuit current calculation of our low- voltage switchgears and type selection. Downloading is available only those who purchase CD-ROM ''MELSHORT'' for Mitsubishi selection. Contact us at : Information center Our area by area sales centers and contact sites around the world are conveniently located. Technical support questions Access information on products, handling, and maintenance of low-voltage switchgear via the Internet. Web problems: Comment If you have comments on the technical information service, please contact us via the Internet. Standard Access international standards for specific types. Related site We provide technical information on products via the Internet as well as low-voltage switch-gear technical information service. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation M's DINER Home page Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GLOBAL Home page Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.Germany 9 1

LOW-VO L TAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION PRODUCTS

LOW-VO L TAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION PRODUCTS LOW-VO L TAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION PRODUCTS Low-voltage Magnetic Contactor Starters 662 Our Power Distribution Products are compact, easy-to-use, built with safety in mind, including the full lineup of Low-voltage.

More information

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers. Mitsubishi Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers. Mitsubishi Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit s Earth Leakage Circuit s Mitsubishi Molded Case Circuit s and Earth Leakage Circuit s 1 INDEX 1 3 6 9 Introduction and Features of WS-V Series 1. Outline of Mitsubishi Circuit s 1)

More information

World Super Series WSS The extensive breaker series from Mitsubishi Electric

World Super Series WSS The extensive breaker series from Mitsubishi Electric MODEL PUSH TO TRIP TEST 3 P IEC60947-2 JIS C 8201-2 Ue 690VAC 00VAC 440VAC 41VAC 400VAC 380VAC 230VAC T Ir Ip Is Ts EN60947-2 40 C Icu/Ics 8/8kA 30/30kA 8/8kA MODEL POLE Ui 690VAC 0-60Hz 8kV Uimp PUSH

More information

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC. Low Voltage Switchgears Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers Disconnectors. WSS, PSS & Super Series 3 A 1600 A. Technical Catalogue

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC. Low Voltage Switchgears Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers Disconnectors. WSS, PSS & Super Series 3 A 1600 A. Technical Catalogue Low Voltage Switchgears Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers Disconnectors WSS, PSS & Super Series A 100 A Technical Catalogue 2004 Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers The new World Super Series WSS completes the

More information

LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR S-N Motor Control Mitsubishi Electric s S-N Series contactors are perfect for the control of 3 phase power, either for the direct control of a motor, to supply power to a drive or

More information

MITSUBISHI NO-FUSE BREAKER NF125-SGW MODEL. In A Ir A 3P Uimp 8kV. 40 C Ue. Icu/Ics 690VAC. 8/8kA 525VAC. POLE Ui690V Cat.A.

MITSUBISHI NO-FUSE BREAKER NF125-SGW MODEL. In A Ir A 3P Uimp 8kV. 40 C Ue. Icu/Ics 690VAC. 8/8kA 525VAC. POLE Ui690V Cat.A. 0 0 0.5 T. 4 0 Ir 10 14 0 0.5 T Ir. 4 10 14 0 0 0.5 T. 4 0 Ir 10 14 0 0.5 T Ir. 4 10 14 ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATI World Super Series POLE Ui90V Cat.A NF5-SGW 100 In A Ir -100A P Uimp kv PUSH TO TRIP 50/0Hz

More information

GJL 100 A Molded Case Circuit Breaker GJL 75 A Motor Circuit Protector

GJL 100 A Molded Case Circuit Breaker GJL 75 A Motor Circuit Protector GJL 100 A Molded Case Circuit Breaker GJL 75 A Motor Circuit Protector Catalog 0500CT9702R409 2009 Class 525/580 CONTENTS Description............................................. Page General Characteristics...................................

More information

Instantaneous tripping TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C IEC RCCB TYPE C IEC61008 RCBO 25, 40, 63A. IEC61009 Isolating Switch

Instantaneous tripping TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C IEC RCCB TYPE C IEC61008 RCBO 25, 40, 63A. IEC61009 Isolating Switch Features (1) All models fully comply with IEC regulations (2) Units can be mounted on a standard 35mm IEC rail (3) Residual current circuit breakers use an original Mitsubishi Electric IC securing reliable

More information

Mitsubishi Breaker Line-up

Mitsubishi Breaker Line-up Mitsubishi Breaker Line-up MCB DIN Series MCCB WS-V Series MCCB WS Series ACB AE-SW Series CP DIN Series December 4 th, 2015 Mitsubishi Electric Corp. Fukuyama Works Page 1 Agenda 1 2 3 LVS Product Overview

More information

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS & CIRCUIT PROTECTORS HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE 06A

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS & CIRCUIT PROTECTORS HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE 06A MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS & CIRCUIT PROTECTORS HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE 06A CTENTS 1. Items to be practiced without fail for safety 1.1 Cautionary

More information

3 - Protection components Motor circuit-breakers

3 - Protection components Motor circuit-breakers Contents 0 - Protection components Motor circuit-breakers protection components for the motor protection Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers Selection guide..............................................page

More information

Selection Guide Motor Control Device Solutions

Selection Guide Motor Control Device Solutions Selection Guide Motor Control Device Solutions Expect more and get it from c3controls. Our portfolio of Motor Control Devices consists of worldclass products designed and manufactured to meet your requirements

More information

MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS MOLDED-CSE CIRCUIT BREKERS & ERTH-LEKGE CIRCUIT BREKERS Mitsubishi Electric Corporation s Fukuyama Works. witch produces these products, is certified as meeting the ISO14001 environmental management system

More information

Interchangeable Built-in Fixed thermal Adjustable thermal Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable Electronic RMS 7 LS LSI

Interchangeable Built-in Fixed thermal Adjustable thermal Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable Electronic RMS 7 LS LSI . Technical Data and Specifications Ratings Frames EG, JG and LG EG JG LG Maximum rated current (amperes) 15, 160 1 50 400, 630 Breaker type 3 B B E S S H H C E S H C U X E S H C U X of poles 1, 3, 4,

More information

Manual Motor Starters. Meta-MEC

Manual Motor Starters. Meta-MEC Manual Motor Starters Meta-MEC Manual Motor Starters LS Meta-MEC Manual Motor Starters provide completed ranges up to 100A 45 mm 55 mm 32AF 2 2 45 mm 70 mm 63AF 100AF 3 3 Manual LS Meta-MEC Motor Starters

More information

Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type accessories

Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type accessories . ccessories Internal ccessories 1. ccessories Table -1: ccessories Internal accessories Function pplicable models assette-type accessories L larm switch Electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit

More information

DNX 3 MCB 4500 A / 6 ka Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side

DNX 3 MCB 4500 A / 6 ka Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 (0)5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 (0)5 55 06 88 88 DNX 3 MCB 4500 A / 6 ka CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use... 1 2. Range... 1 3. Overall dimensions... 1 4. Preparation

More information

UTS400 SELECTION GUIDE CATALOG NUMBERING [PRODUCT SELECTION] UTS400 NT ATU 400A 3P LL LSIS UL MCCB

UTS400 SELECTION GUIDE CATALOG NUMBERING [PRODUCT SELECTION] UTS400 NT ATU 400A 3P LL LSIS UL MCCB PRODUCT CATALOG SELECTION GUIDE UTS400 CATALOG NUMBERING [PRODUCT SELECTION] UTS400 NT ATU 400A 3P LL UL SERIES & FRAME: Susol 400AF PERFORMANCE Rating 80% 0% ka N NT 65 SUFFIX UL : UL 240Vac H HT 0 L

More information

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RCBO s & DIN RAIL MOUNTED FUSE HOLDERS

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RCBO s & DIN RAIL MOUNTED FUSE HOLDERS MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RCBO s & DIN RAIL MOUNTED FUSE HOLDERS MANUFACTURED IN THE EU EUROPEAN QUALITY 1, 2 & 3 POLE MCB s TRIPPING CURVES C & D CURRENT RATINGS 1AMP TO 63AMPS 10KA BREAKING CAPACITY

More information

cor Long Run Experience

cor Long Run Experience Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 16-1250A cor Long Run Experience cor Breaking capacity (according to IEC 947-2 at 415V) Icu 100 D160L D250L D400L D630L 70 60 DH800 50 35 30

More information

GV2, GV3, and GV7 Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors Standard Features

GV2, GV3, and GV7 Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors Standard Features Standard Features Table : Standard Features GV2ME GV2P GV3P GV7RE/GV7RS 0. to 32 A Up to 20 hp @ 460 V 0 SCCR @ 480 V Push Button Operator 0. to 30 A Up to 5 hp @ 460 V 50 SCCR @ 480 V Rotary Handle Operator

More information

D509E. Manual Motor - Starters

D509E. Manual Motor - Starters D509E Manual Motor - Starters Index Page Manual Motors Starters 182 Auxilliary Contact Blocks 182 Trip Alarm Aux. Switch 182 Shunt Release 182 Under-voltage Release 183 Accessories 183 Busbar Connectors

More information

Series KTU7 UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series KTU7 UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series KTU7 UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Versatile, convenient and space saving for a variety of applications Sprecher+Schuh s KTU7 series of UL Molded Case Circuit Breakers are UL489 and CE listed

More information

MULTI 9 System Catalog IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers

MULTI 9 System Catalog IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers Standard Features Fast Closing Allows increased withstand to the high inrush currents of some loads Trip-free mechanism: Contacts cannot be held in the on position when

More information

Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side

Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Téléphone : 05 55 06 87 87 Télécopie : 05 55 06 88 88 DX 3 MCB 10000 A / 16 ka CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use...1 2. Range...1 3. Overall dimensions...1 4. Preparation - Connection...1

More information

DPX Thermal magnetic and trip-free switches DPX 3 -I 160

DPX Thermal magnetic and trip-free switches DPX 3 -I 160 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 05 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 05 55 06 88 88 DPX 3 160 CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3. DIMENSIONS 1 4. OVERVIEW 2 5. ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3 6. CONFORMITY

More information

and other modular devices for low voltage installation

and other modular devices for low voltage installation Technical catalogue System and other modular devices for low voltage installation 2CSC400002D0204 SUMMARY Introduction Miniature Circuit-Breakers Residual Current Devices Auxiliary elements and accessories

More information

Instantaneous tripping TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C IEC RCCB TYPE C IEC61008 RCBO 25, 40, 63A. IEC61009 Isolating Switch

Instantaneous tripping TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C TYPE B, C, D TYPE B, C IEC RCCB TYPE C IEC61008 RCBO 25, 40, 63A. IEC61009 Isolating Switch Features () All models fully comply with IEC regulations () Units can be mounted on a standard 5mm IEC rail () Residual current circuit breakers use an original Mitsubishi Electric IC securing reliable

More information

DMX 3 -I 2500 switch disconnectors

DMX 3 -I 2500 switch disconnectors 8704 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone : 0 0 87 87 Fax : 0 0 88 88 DMX 3 200 circuit breakers DMX 3 -I 200 switch disconnectors References: 0 28 20 / 21 / 22 / 23 / 24 / 2 / 2 / 30 / 31/ 32/ 33/ 34 / 3 / 3 / 40

More information

Series KTU7 UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series KTU7 UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Versatile, convenient and space saving for a variety of applications Sprecher+Schuh s series of UL are UL489 and CE listed for global applications. The current

More information

MS /27/2015. ABB contact for United States of America. General Information Extended Product Type: Categories

MS /27/2015. ABB contact for United States of America. General Information Extended Product Type: Categories Page 1 of 5 MS132-10 ABB contact for United States of America General Information Extended Product Type: Product ID: EAN: Catalog Description: Long Description: MS132-10 1SAM350000R1010 4013614400100 MS132-10

More information

Control Circuit Protection

Control Circuit Protection Contents 5SJ4 Branch Circuit Protectors 5SY4 Supplementary Protectors 5SY6 Supplementary Protectors 16/19 5SJ4 Page Selection and ordering data 1-pole up to 63A 16/4 1-pole, 2-pole, 16/5 3-pole, 240VAC

More information

Meta Solution. Contactors and Overload relays

Meta Solution. Contactors and Overload relays Meta Solution Contactors and Overload relays Meta Solution New generation of Contactors from LSIS Contactors and Overload Relays Metasol Contactors Designed to show superior technology: The Metasol series

More information

Index. Manual Motor Starters 1. Auxiliary Contact Blocks 1. Trip Alarm Auxiliary 1. Switch. Shunt Release 1. Under-voltage Release 2.

Index. Manual Motor Starters 1. Auxiliary Contact Blocks 1. Trip Alarm Auxiliary 1. Switch. Shunt Release 1. Under-voltage Release 2. Index Index Page Manual Motor Starters 1 Auxiliary Contact Blocks 1 Trip Alarm Auxiliary 1 Switch Shunt Release 1 Under-voltage Release 2 Accessories 2 Busbar Connectors 2 Enclosures 2 Leistung, kw C mv

More information

Protection components

Protection components Presentation, characteristics Presentation 1 2 3 motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1. Connection These circuit-breakers are designed

More information

, , PREPARATION - CONNECTION. Mounting:. On symmetrical EN rail or DIN 35 rail

, , PREPARATION - CONNECTION. Mounting:. On symmetrical EN rail or DIN 35 rail 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 (0)5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 (0)5 55 06 88 88 DX 3 4500 A / 6 ka CONTENTS PAGES 1. Description, use...1 2. Range...1 3. Overall dimensions...1 4. Preparation - Connection...1

More information

DPX moulded case circuit breakers

DPX moulded case circuit breakers BREAKING AND PROTECTION DEVICES 10 / 2011 DPX moulded case circuit breakers DPX moulded case circuit breakers offer optimum solutions for the protection requirements of commercial and industrial installations.

More information

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 25 HP / 600 VAC

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 25 HP / 600 VAC AF09... AF0 -pole Contactors up to 25 HP / 600 VAC Contactors and Overload Relays Overview.../0 AF09... AF0 -pole Contactors.../2 Main Technical Data.../8 Main Accessory Fitting Details.../2 Main Accessory.../24

More information

Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW63

Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW63 Functions and characteristics Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW63 NT and NW selection criteria Masterpact NT Masterpact NW NT06, NT08, NT10, NT12, NT16 NT06, NT08, NT10

More information

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Molded Case Circuit Breaker & The Ultimate Safety Breaker Molded Case Circuit Breaker www.terasaki.co.jp Catalogue No. 13!5E ! Safety Notice Carefully read instruction manual to ensure proper installation, connection, operation,

More information

DX³ 4-pole RCBO 6000 A/10 ka

DX³ 4-pole RCBO 6000 A/10 ka 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 (0)5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 (0)5 55 06 88 88 DX³ 4-pole RCBO CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use... 1 2. Range... 1 3. Overall dimensions... 1 4. Preparation - Connection...

More information

COMPLETE SOLUTIONS FOR POWER PROTECTION

COMPLETE SOLUTIONS FOR POWER PROTECTION COMPLETE SOLUTIONS FOR POWER PROTECTION GLOBAL SPECIALIST IN ELECTRICAL AND DIGITAL BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURES Modular protection P. 8 RX 3 MCBs 63 A 4500 & 6000 P. 18 DX 3 -IS isolating switches P. 9 RX

More information

Product Line Overview. The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly

Product Line Overview. The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly Circuit Breakers & Supplementary Protectors 15 00 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview -3 General Information Cutler-Hammer Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers provide increased

More information

MS General Information Extended Product Type: MS

MS General Information Extended Product Type: MS MS132-1.6 General Information Extended Product Type: MS132-1.6 Product ID: 1SAM350000R1006 EAN: 4013614400063 Catalog Description: MS132-1.6 Manual Motor Starter Long Description: The MS132-1.6 manual

More information

01 Spectra Plus - Introduction

01 Spectra Plus - Introduction 01 Spectra Plus - Introduction Standard features Conforming to IS13947-2/EN60947 2 Compact dimensions Available in 3P & 4P High performance microprocessor protection release Wide overload setting from

More information

C 1. SPECTRONIC SP - Air circuit breakers. Summary. C2. General characteristics. C3. Fixed circuit breaker. C4. Withdrawable circuit breakers

C 1. SPECTRONIC SP - Air circuit breakers. Summary. C2. General characteristics. C3. Fixed circuit breaker. C4. Withdrawable circuit breakers SPETRONI SP - Air circuit breakers Summary 2. General characteristics 3. Fixed circuit breaker 4. Withdrawable circuit breakers 5. haracteristics 6. RV23: protection and control unit 6. RV+ : protection

More information

Low voltage moulded case circuit breaker EB2

Low voltage moulded case circuit breaker EB2 Low voltage moulded case circuit breaker EB2 Product series description unit condition Model-type Number of poles Nominal current ratings Electrical characteristics Rated operational voltage Rated insulation

More information

Phase + Neutral, neutral on right side

Phase + Neutral, neutral on right side 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 5 55 06 88 88 DX 3 MCB 6000 A / 10 ka Cat.. N (s): 4 074 67 / 68 / 69 / 70 / 71 / 72 / 73 / 74 / 75 / 76 / 77 / 78 / 79 ; 4 077 33 / 34

More information

Specification for 70mm pole pitch Air circuit breaker up to 1600 A

Specification for 70mm pole pitch Air circuit breaker up to 1600 A Specification for 70mm pole pitch Air circuit breaker up to 1600 A Protective device for low voltage electrical installation Last update :2011-07-08-1 - Table of contents: 1 General...3 2 Compliance with

More information

DPX 1600 Electronic release

DPX 1600 Electronic release 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 05 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 05 55 06 88 88 DPX 1600 CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3. DIMENSIONS 1 3. DIMENSIONS (NEXT) 2 4. OVERVIEW 2 5. CONNECTION 2 6. ELECTRICAL AND

More information

Low voltage circuit breakers

Low voltage circuit breakers Super Solution North American Edition Low voltage circuit breakers Contents Overview Main characteristics Accessories Technical information Mounting & connection Characteristics curves Dimensions A-1 A-2

More information

DPX earth leakage DPX 3 -I earth leakage

DPX earth leakage DPX 3 -I earth leakage 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 05 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 05 55 06 88 88 DPX 3 250 + earth leakage Reference(s) : 420 225/ 227/ 228/229/ 255/ 257/ 258/ 259/ 285/ 287/ CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3.

More information

Cat. N (s) : /65/66/83/84, /94/95/96/99, /01/02/06/07/11/12/13/14. Pollution degree : C / + 40 C. .

Cat. N (s) : /65/66/83/84, /94/95/96/99, /01/02/06/07/11/12/13/14. Pollution degree : C / + 40 C. . 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone : (+33) 05 55 06 87 87 Fax : (+ 33) 05 55 06 88 88 R.C.C.B. s 0090 00/01/02/06/07/11/12/13/14 0/01/02/06/07/11/12/13/14/18/19/23/24/25/26/ /18/19/23/24/25/26/45/46 45/46 0090

More information

1 Phase electronic contactor (SC 1)

1 Phase electronic contactor (SC 1) 1 Phase electronic contactor (SC 1) - Rated operational voltage up to 600VAC 50/60 Hz - Rated operational current up to 15/30A/50/63A AC-1 - Control voltage from or - Compact modular design 22.5, 45, or

More information

Introduction. Standard Features. GV2, GV3, and GV7 Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors Introduction

Introduction. Standard Features. GV2, GV3, and GV7 Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors Introduction Introduction Introduction Schneider Electric offers a complete line of products for the manual control and protection of motors. This catalog covers those devices designed to meet IEC standards for protection

More information

1489-M Circuit Breakers

1489-M Circuit Breakers Dual terminals provide wiring/bus bar flexibility and clamp from both sides to improve connection reliability Terminal design helps prevent wiring misses Scratch- and solventresistant printing Suitable

More information

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER Technical Article MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER T 146 PURCHASE he Spaceage MCB protects wires and cables automatically against overload and short-circuits in domestic, commercial and industrial installations.

More information

Non-fusible. Non-fusible disconnect switches 16A 3150A, 600VAC A, 1000VDC. International acceptance. Disconnect switches.

Non-fusible. Non-fusible disconnect switches 16A 3150A, 600VAC A, 1000VDC. International acceptance. Disconnect switches. disconnect 16A 31A, 0VAC 200-0A, 1000VDC Disconnect Disconnect ABB SwitchLine includes 16 different amperage sizes from 16A to 31A. The basic construction provides flexibility, safety, and high performance

More information

Protection Equipment

Protection Equipment Protection Equipment Price Groups 101, 102, 121, 131, 143 /2 Introduction Motor Starter Protectors/ Circuit Breakers SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors up to 40 A new /7 General data /13 For motor protection

More information

DPX Electronic + earth leakage

DPX Electronic + earth leakage 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 5 55 06 88 88 DPX 3 250 Electronic + earth leakage CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3. DIMENSIONS 1 3. DIMENSIONS (NEXT) 2 4. ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

More information

Series L9 UL489 Miniature Circuit Breakers

Series L9 UL489 Miniature Circuit Breakers Series L9 UL489 iniature Circuit Breakers Industrial Circuit Breakers for Branch Circuit Protection up to 63 Amps L9 Series B Circuit Breakers Series B L9 UL489 circuit breakers offer new features, expanded

More information

Molded Case Circuit Breakers H series General information

Molded Case Circuit Breakers H series General information General information Description Models with high breaking capacities Line protection : 15 to 800A Motor protection : 16 to 5A Molded case color : Black Type number nomenclature Series H: H 5 BA / E Q M

More information

Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches. Ex9 Series - M. na.noark-electric.

Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches. Ex9 Series - M. na.noark-electric. Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches MS50T3L M2N200T3L Ex9 Series - M na.noark-electric.com NOARK Ex9 Series - M Features Molded Case Circuit

More information

DPX Thermal magnetic and trip-free switches DPX 3 -I 250

DPX Thermal magnetic and trip-free switches DPX 3 -I 250 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 05 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 05 55 06 88 88 DPX 3 250 Reference(s) : 420 205/ 207/ 208/209/ 215/ 217/ 218/ 219/ 235/ 237/ CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3. DIMENSIONS 1 3.

More information

Protection Equipment. 5/2 Introduction

Protection Equipment. 5/2 Introduction Protection Equipment /2 Introduction SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/ Circuit Breakers up to 40 A /6 General data /12 For motor protection /14 For motor protection with overload relay function /1

More information

AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals

AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals 25 to 55 A culus CE Application AF09... AF38 4-pole contactors are used for controlling power circuits up to 600 V AC and 240 V DC.

More information

The breakers offer thermal-magnetic trip protection according to Z and K characteristics.

The breakers offer thermal-magnetic trip protection according to Z and K characteristics. Series High Performance Circuit Breakers Description The high performance MCB offers a compact solution to circuit protection. The devices are DIN rail mounted. The is available with application-specific

More information

Circuit-Breakers M4 166 for motor protection. Auxiliary contacts 167 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases

Circuit-Breakers M4 166 for motor protection. Auxiliary contacts 167 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases Index Page Circuit-Breakers M4 166 for motor protection Auxiliary contacts 167 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases Insulated 3-pole busbar system 168 Terminal block DIN-rail adapters 169 Busbar adapters

More information

Series L9 UL-489 Miniature Circuit Breakers

Series L9 UL-489 Miniature Circuit Breakers Series UL-489 iniature Breakers Industrial Breakers for Branch up to 40 Amps Sprecher+Schuh includes a line of circuit breakers approved for branch circuit applications in the United States and Canada

More information

FMotor Circuit Controllers

FMotor Circuit Controllers Technical Information Motor Circuit Controller IEC Performance Data Catalog Number KTA7-25S...32S 0.16A 0.25A 0.4A 0.63A 1A 1.6A 2.5A 4A 6.3A 10A 16A 20A 25A 29A 32A Rated Operational Current, I e [A]

More information

87045 LIMOGES Cedex. 2. PRODUCT RANGE (continued) 1. DESCRIPTION - USE. Breaking capacity : Symbol : Technology : 3. OVERALL DIMENSIONS

87045 LIMOGES Cedex. 2. PRODUCT RANGE (continued) 1. DESCRIPTION - USE. Breaking capacity : Symbol : Technology : 3. OVERALL DIMENSIONS 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone : + 33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax : + 33 5 55 06 88 88 R.C.B.O. DX 6000 A Phase + Neutral,, neutral on right side Cat. n (s) : 077 31 077 44-077 77 077 84 078 79 079 01-083 95 084 06 084

More information

Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches Ex9 Series - M

Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches Ex9 Series - M Data Sheet Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Switches Ex9 Series - M MS50T3L M2N200T3L na.noark-electric.com NOARK Ex9 Series - M Features Molded Case Circuit

More information

ACW Molded-Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 Listed

ACW Molded-Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 Listed Motors Automation Energy Transmission & Distribution Coatings Molded-Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 Listed Overview Introducing the WEG Series of Molded Case Circuit Breakers now available with UL489 certification.

More information

ACW. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 Listed. ACW Catalog Number Sequence

ACW. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 Listed. ACW Catalog Number Sequence rotection rotectors Contactors Overloads Relays ushbuttons Molded-Case Breaker UL 489 Listed The EG Series of Molded Case Breakers are designed to provide overload and short-circuit protection for industrial

More information

BETA Switching Switches and Light Indicators

BETA Switching Switches and Light Indicators Siemens AG 2008 BETA Switching /2 Product overview /3 5TE8 control switches / 5TE4 pushbuttons /2 5TE5 light indicators /5 5TE8 ON/OFF switches /22 5TE9 busbars /24 5TE switch disconnectors Siemens ET

More information

DPX 630 Electronic release

DPX 630 Electronic release 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Phone :+33 05 55 06 87 87 Fax :+33 05 55 06 88 88 DPX 630 CONTENTS PAGES 1. USE 1 2. RANGE 1 3. DIMENSIONS 1 4. OVERVIEW 2 5. CONNECTION 2 6. ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

More information

4 - Miniature controls

4 - Miniature controls Index -....1.22 Selection Contactors for connection to PLCs, B6S & B7S, 3 phase...6 Contactors, Interface, B6 & B7, 3 phase...5 Contactors, features...1 Contactors, mechanically interlocked, B6 & B7, 3

More information

DX³ RCBO 4500/6 ka Phase + Neutral, neutral on left

DX³ RCBO 4500/6 ka Phase + Neutral, neutral on left 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 5 55 06 88 88 DX³ RCBO 4500/6 ka CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use... 1 2. Range... 1 3. Overall dimensions... 1 4. Preparation Connection...

More information

Product index. 4 - Manual motor protectors. Manual motor protectors. Manual motor protectors Low Voltage Products & Systems 4.

Product index. 4 - Manual motor protectors. Manual motor protectors. Manual motor protectors Low Voltage Products & Systems 4. Product index -....1.3 Features and benefits...1 General information Suitable applications...2 -.3 Motor ratings... Pilot duty ratings and overload trip classes...5 Ordering details Type MS116...6 Type

More information

Memshield - ACB Ratings & Specifications

Memshield - ACB Ratings & Specifications Memshield Memshield - ACB Ratings & Specifications Rating and specifications Current rating, A List No Number of poles RATED CURRENT (A) [In] IEC, BS, VDE, AS Neutral pole ampere frame (A) RATED PRIMARY

More information

MCBs and accessories are certified under CSA C22.2 No. 235 per File LR Tripping characteristics

MCBs and accessories are certified under CSA C22.2 No. 235 per File LR Tripping characteristics Miniature circuit breakers General information General information Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) are used throughout the world in all types of electrical installations. ABB MCBs are recognized for

More information

AF / AF12Z pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals

AF / AF12Z pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals Technical Datasheet 1SBC101404D0201 24/03/11-30-10-.. / Z-30-10-.. 3-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals (Z) contactors are used for controlling power circuits up to 690 V AC and 220

More information

Technical data for manual motor starters Type MS325

Technical data for manual motor starters Type MS325 for manual mor starters Type MS325 General data Rated voltage 600 V Rated current 25 A (14 setting ranges, 0.1 25A) Rated frequency 50-60 Hz Electrical and mechanical life endurance 100,000 operations

More information

3VU13, 3VU16 Circuit-Breakers

3VU13, 3VU16 Circuit-Breakers 3VU3, 3VU6 Circuit-Breakers Description The 3VU3, 3VU6 circuit-breakers are compact circuit-breakers for currents up to 80 A which operate according to the current limiting principle. The devices are used

More information

General data 5/37. Overview

General data 5/37. Overview General data Overview Benefits High short-circuit breaking capacity in the feeder Optimum usability in motor feeders for the special voltages 440 V, 480 V, 0 V and 690 V Compact design The are available

More information

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data Main pole - Utilization characteristics according to IEC Standards IEC 60947- / 60947-4- and EN 60947- / 60947-4- Rated operational voltage Ue max. 690 V Rated frequency (without derating) 50 / 60 Hz Conventional

More information

15 16 MCCBs for Power Distribution Technical Specification Frame 100A 250A 250A 400A 400A 630A 800 / 1000 / 1250 Type C DN0-100 D DN1-250 N DN2-250 D N S H DN3B-400 DN3-400 D N D N S V DN3-630 DN4-1250

More information

RX 3 MCB 4500 A Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side

RX 3 MCB 4500 A Phase + Neutral, neutral on left side 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Téléphone : 05 55 06 87 87 Télécopie : 05 55 06 88 88 RX 3 MCB 4500 A CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use... 1 2. Range... 1 3. Overall dimensions... 1 4. Preparation - Connection...

More information

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC AF0... AF0 -pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC Contactors and Overload Relays Overview...2 AF0... AF0 -pole Contactors Ordering Details...4 Main Technical Data...20 DC Circuit switching...2 Main Accessory

More information

DX³ RCCBs - ID 4P up to 100 A

DX³ RCCBs - ID 4P up to 100 A 87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone number: +33 (0)5 55 06 87 87 Fax: +33 (0)5 55 06 88 88 DX³ s - ID CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description, use... 1 2. Range... 1 3. Overall dimensions... 1 4. Preparation - Connection...

More information

Page. Circuit-Breakers M4 2 for motor protection. Auxiliary contacts 3 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases

Page. Circuit-Breakers M4 2 for motor protection. Auxiliary contacts 3 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases Circuit Breakers M4 Page Circuit-Breakers M4 2 for motor protection Auxiliary contacts 3 Signalling switch Auxiliary releases Insulated 3-pole busbar system 4 Terminal block DIN-rail adapters 5 Busbar

More information

3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A

3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A Katalog LV 36 AT Österreich - Auszug 2012 3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A SENTRON Schutz-, Schalt- und Messtechnik www.siemens.com/lowvoltage 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A 1 Technical

More information

Cat N 3. OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Cat N 3. OVERALL DIMENSIONS Cat N Motor driven remote control module 87045 LIMOGES Cedex - FRANCE Telephone : + 33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax: + 33 5 55 06 88 88 Cat N : : 4 062 91 CONTENTS PAGE 1. Description - Use...1 2. Product range...1

More information

ME 07 Air Circuit Breakers. ME 07 - Air Circuit Breakers. Low Voltage. Low Voltage. Low Voltage

ME 07 Air Circuit Breakers. ME 07 - Air Circuit Breakers. Low Voltage. Low Voltage. Low Voltage Low Voltage ME 07 - Air Circuit Breakers ME 07 Air Circuit Breakers Low Voltage AEG Niederspannungstechnik GmbH & Co KG Berliner Platz 2-6 D-24534 Neumünster (Germany) Tel. +49/43211-0 Fax +49/43211-144

More information

Moulded case circuit breakers

Moulded case circuit breakers Moulded case circuit breakers CONTENT Range 4 Protection Releases 5 Salient Features 8 Accessories, 4 Technical data 2 Time Current Characteristics 5 Overall Dimensions 7 SN4 SN3 SN2 SN 3 RANGE Moulded

More information

FUSOMAT Visible breaking and tripping fuse switches from 250 to 1250 A

FUSOMAT Visible breaking and tripping fuse switches from 250 to 1250 A Fuse protection The solution for > Motor load break > Protection of industrial cabinet > Electrical distribution fusom_063_b_1_cat Strong points > Tripping upon overload > High breaking capacity > Improved

More information

Product index. 4 - Manual motor protectors. Phone: Fax: Web: -

Product index. 4 - Manual motor protectors. Phone: Fax: Web:  - Product index -....1.3 Features and benefits...1 General information Suitable applications...2 -.3 Motor ratings... Pilot duty ratings and overload trip classes...5 Ordering details Type MS116...6 Type

More information

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 630AF~6300AF 15A

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 630AF~6300AF 15A Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 6AF~60AF A Mitsubishi Presents the WS Series, Satisfied with the High Demands of the st Century Global Market. Best-Solution Various line-up and high flexibility High-Performance

More information

NEW TX³ RANGE PROTECTION YOU CAN RELY ON

NEW TX³ RANGE PROTECTION YOU CAN RELY ON TX³ NEW RANGE TRUSTED PROTECTION FOR YOUR INSTALLATIONS GLOBAL SPECIALIST IN ELECTRICAL AND DIGITAL BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURES NEW TX³ RANGE PROTECTION YOU CAN RELY ON Designed to meet the requirements of

More information

6300A 15 Optibreak B1 & B2 Optibreak B1 & B2 50/60 Hz Ue Icu [v] [ka] 415 65 690 40 4h 4i 1. Open / close Indication 2. Charge and Discharge Indicator 3. Release the reset button 4. Laser Nameplate

More information